User Manual

Models T700 and T700U

Dynamic Dilution Calibrators
with NumaView™ Software

© TELEDYNE API (TAPI)

9970 CARROLL CANYON ROAD
SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA 92131-1106
USA

Toll-free Phone: +1 800-324-5190

Phone: +1 858-657-9800
Fax: +1 858-657-9816
Email: [email protected]
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/

Copyright 2019-2020 083730700C DCN8250

Teledyne API 16 January 2020
 NOTICE OF COPYRIGHT
© 2019-20 Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation. All rights reserved.

TRADEMARKS
All trademarks, registered trademarks, brand names or product names appearing in this
document are the property of their respective owners and are used herein for identification
purposes only.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators vii
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
Important safety messages are provided throughout this manual for the purpose of avoiding personal injury or
instrument damage. Please read these messages carefully. Each safety message is associated with a safety alert
symbol, and are placed throughout this manual and inside the instrument. The symbols with messages are defined
as follows:

WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard

HAZARD: Strong oxidizer

GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION: Read the accompanying message for

specific information.

CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning

Do Not Touch. Touching some parts of the instrument without protection

or proper tools could result in damage to the part(s) and/or the
instrument.
Technician Symbol: All operations marked with this symbol are to be
performed by qualified maintenance personnel only.

Electrical Ground: This symbol inside the instrument marks the central
safety grounding point for the instrument.

CAUTION
This instrument should only be used for the purpose and in the manner
described in this manual. If you use this instrument in a manner other
than that for which it was intended, unpredictable behavior could ensue
with possible hazardous consequences.

NEVER use any gas analyzer to sample combustible gas(es)!

Note For Technical Assistance regarding the use and

maintenance of this instrument or any other Teledyne API
product, please contact Teledyne API’s Technical Support
Department:
Telephone: +1 800-324-5190
Email: [email protected]

viii Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ
Des consignes de sécurité importantes sont fournies tout au long du présent manuel dans le but d’éviter des
blessures corporelles ou d’endommager les instruments. Veuillez lire attentivement ces consignes. Chaque
consigne de sécurité est représentée par un pictogramme d’alerte de sécurité; ces pictogrammes se retrouvent
dans ce manuel et à l’intérieur des instruments. Les symboles correspondent aux consignes suivantes :

AVERTISSEMENT : Risque de choc électrique

DANGER : Oxydant puissant

AVERTISSEMENT GÉNÉRAL / MISE EN GARDE : Lire la consigne

complémentaire pour des renseignements spécifiques

MISE EN GARDE : Surface chaude

Ne pas toucher : Toucher à certaines parties de l’instrument sans protection ou

sans les outils appropriés pourrait entraîner des dommages aux pièces ou à
l’instrument.

Pictogramme « technicien » : Toutes les opérations portant ce symbole doivent

être effectuées uniquement par du personnel de maintenance qualifié.

Mise à la terre : Ce symbole à l’intérieur de l’instrument détermine le point central

de la mise à la terre sécuritaire de l’instrument.

MISE EN GARDE
Cet instrument doit être utilisé aux fins décrites et de la manière décrite dans ce
manuel. Si vous utilisez cet instrument d’une autre manière que celle pour
laquelle il a été prévu, l’instrument pourrait se comporter de façon imprévisible
et entraîner des conséquences dangereuses.
NE JAMAIS utiliser un analyseur de gaz pour échantillonner des gaz
combustibles!

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators ix

WARRANTY STATEMENT
WARRANTY POLICY (02024J)
Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation (Teledyne API), a business unit of Teledyne
Instruments, Inc., provides that:
Prior to shipment, Teledyne API equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should
equipment failure occur, Teledyne API assures its customers that prompt service and
support will be available. (For the instrument-specific warranty period, please refer to the
“Limited Warranty” Section in the Terms and Conditions of Sale on our website at the
following link. http://www.teledyne-api.com/terms_and_conditions.asp).
COVERAGE
After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, Teledyne API stands
ready to provide on-site or in-plant service at reasonable rates similar to those of other
manufacturers in the industry. All maintenance and the first level of field troubleshooting
are to be performed by the customer.
NON-TELEDYNE API MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT
Equipment provided but not manufactured by Teledyne API is warranted and will be
repaired to the extent and according to the current terms and conditions of the respective
equipment manufacturer’s warranty.
PRODUCT RETURN
All units or components returned to Teledyne API should be properly packed for handling
and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center. After the repair, the
equipment will be returned, freight prepaid.

The complete Terms and Conditions of Sale can be reviewed at http://www.teledyne-

api.com/terms_and_conditions.asp

CAUTION – AVOID WARRANTY INVALIDATION

Failure to comply with proper anti-Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) handling and
packing instructions and Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) procedures
when returning parts for repair or calibration may void your warranty. For anti-
ESD handling and packing instructions please refer to the manual,
Fundamentals of ESD, PN 04786, in its “Packing Components for Return to
Teledyne API’s Customer Service” section. The manual can be downloaded
from our website at http://www.teledyne-api.com. RMA procedures can also be
found on our website.

x Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
In addition to the safety symbols as presented in the Important Safety Information page,
this manual provides special notices related to the safety and effective use of the analyzer
and other pertinent information.
Special Notices appear as follows:

ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY

This special notice provides information to avoid damage
to your instrument and possibly invalidate the warranty.

Important IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA

Provides information about that which could either affect
accuracy of instrument readings or cause loss of data.

Note Provides information pertinent to the proper care,

operation or maintenance of the instrument or its parts.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators xi

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION, SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS ................................................ 22
1.1. Calibrator Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 22
1.2. Features ...................................................................................................................................................... 22
1.3. Options ........................................................................................................................................................ 23
1.4. T700 Specifications ..................................................................................................................................... 25
1.5. T700U Specifications .................................................................................................................................. 27
1.6. Approvals and Certifications ....................................................................................................................... 29
1.6.1. Safety ................................................................................................................................................... 29
1.6.2. EMC ..................................................................................................................................................... 29
1.6.3. Other Type Certifications ..................................................................................................................... 29
2. GETTING STARTED .......................................................................................................... 30
2.1. Unpacking ................................................................................................................................................... 30
2.1.1. Ventilation Clearance ........................................................................................................................... 31
2.2. Instrument Layout........................................................................................................................................ 31
2.2.1. Front Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 32
2.2.2. Rear Panel ........................................................................................................................................... 33
2.2.3. Internal Layout ..................................................................................................................................... 35
2.3. Connections ................................................................................................................................................ 37
2.3.1. Electrical Connections ......................................................................................................................... 37
2.3.1.1. Connecting Power ........................................................................................................................ 37
2.3.1.2. Connecting Analog Outputs ......................................................................................................... 38
2.3.1.3. Connecting the Status Outputs (Digital Outputs) ......................................................................... 38
2.3.1.4. Connecting the Control Inputs (Digital Inputs) ............................................................................. 39
2.3.1.5. Connecting the Digital Control Outputs ........................................................................................ 41
2.3.1.6. Connecting the External Valve Driver Option ............................................................................... 41
2.3.1.7. Connecting the Communications Interfaces................................................................................. 44
2.3.2. Pneumatic Connections ....................................................................................................................... 50
2.3.2.1. Important Information About Diluent Gas (Zero Air) ..................................................................... 50
2.3.2.2. Important Information About Calibration Gas ............................................................................... 50
2.3.2.3. Connecting Diluent Source Gas to the Calibrator ........................................................................ 51
2.3.2.4. Connecting Calibration Source Gas to the Calibrator .................................................................. 51
2.3.2.5. Setup for Direct Connections to Other Instruments ..................................................................... 52
2.3.2.6. Connecting the Calibrator to a Sample Gas Manifold .................................................................. 53
2.3.2.7. Connecting the Calibrator to a Calibration Manifold ..................................................................... 54
2.3.2.8. Connecting the Calibrator to a Dual Span Gas / Zero Air Calibration Manifold ........................... 55
2.3.2.9. T700 Pneumatic Flow for O3 Generator Option ........................................................................... 56
2.3.2.10. T700 Pneumatic Flow for O3 Generator with Photometer Option .............................................. 58
2.3.2.11. T700 Pneumatic Flow for Multiple Calibration Source Gas MFCs ............................................. 60
2.3.2.12. Pneumatic Flow and Setup for Permeation Tube Gas Generator ............................................. 63
2.4. Startup and Functional Checks ................................................................................................................... 69
2.4.1. Initial Startup ........................................................................................................................................ 69
2.4.2. Alerts: Warnings and Other Messages ................................................................................................ 70
2.4.3. Functional Checks and Verification ..................................................................................................... 70
2.4.4. Calibration Gas Inlet Ports Setup ........................................................................................................ 71
2.4.5. Setting the Calibrator’s Total Gas Flow Rate ...................................................................................... 73
2.4.6. Selecting a Mode for the O3 Generator Option .................................................................................... 74
2.4.6.1. CNST (CONSTANT) Mode........................................................................................................... 74
2.4.6.2. REF (REFERENCE) Mode ........................................................................................................... 74
2.4.6.3. BNCH (BENCH) Mode ................................................................................................................. 74
2.5. Menu Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 75
2.5.1. Home ................................................................................................................................................... 78
2.5.2. Dashboard ........................................................................................................................................... 79
2.5.3. Alerts .................................................................................................................................................... 80
2.5.4. Generate .............................................................................................................................................. 81

xii Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 2.5.5. Utilities ................................................................................................................................................. 82
2.5.5.1. Datalog View ................................................................................................................................ 82
2.5.5.2. Alerts Log ..................................................................................................................................... 82
2.5.5.3. USB Utilities (Downloads and Updates) ....................................................................................... 82
2.5.5.4. Diagnostics ................................................................................................................................... 85
2.5.6. Setup .................................................................................................................................................... 85
2.6. Setup Menu: Features/Functions Configuration ........................................................................................ 85
2.6.1. Setup>Data Logging (Data Acquisition System, DAS) ........................................................................ 86
2.6.1.1. Configuring Trigger Types: Periodic ............................................................................................. 87
2.6.1.2. Configuring Trigger Types: Conditional ....................................................................................... 88
2.6.1.3. Downloading DAS (Data Acquisition System) Data ..................................................................... 88
2.6.2. Setup>Events ...................................................................................................................................... 89
2.6.3. Setup>Dashboard ................................................................................................................................ 91
2.6.4. Setup>Vars: Internal Variables ............................................................................................................ 91
2.6.5. Setup>Homescreen ............................................................................................................................. 92
2.6.6. Setup>Digital (Status) Outputs ............................................................................................................ 92
2.6.7. Setup>Sequences: Automatic Calibration Operations ........................................................................ 93
2.6.7.1. Setting Up Control Inputs for a Sequence .................................................................................... 95
2.6.7.2. Setting Up Control Outputs for a Sequence ................................................................................. 96
2.6.7.3. Parameters for the Step Types .................................................................................................... 97
2.6.7.4. Deleting or Editing Sequences or Individual Steps in a Sequence .............................................. 97
2.6.8. Setup > Levels: Setting up and using LEADS (Dasibi) Operating Levels ........................................... 98
2.6.8.1. General Information about LEADS Levels ................................................................................... 98
2.6.8.2. Dot commands ............................................................................................................................. 98
2.6.8.3. Programming, Editing, and Activating Levels ............................................................................... 99
2.6.8.4. Programming Levels..................................................................................................................... 99
2.6.8.5. Editing/Deleting Levels ............................................................................................................... 100
2.6.8.6. Activating Levels ......................................................................................................................... 100
2.6.9. Setup > Analog Output ...................................................................................................................... 100
2.6.9.1. Analog Output Voltage Range Configuration ............................................................................. 102
2.6.9.2. Adding a Recorder Offset ........................................................................................................... 102
2.6.9.3. Analog Output Channel Calibration ............................................................................................ 102
2.6.10. Setup > Instrument .......................................................................................................................... 103
2.6.11. Setup > Comm: Communications Ports .......................................................................................... 104
2.6.11.1. COM1/COM2 ............................................................................................................................ 104
2.6.11.2. TCP Port1 ................................................................................................................................. 105
2.6.11.3. TCP Port2 ................................................................................................................................. 105
2.6.11.4. Network Settings ...................................................................................................................... 105
2.6.12. Setup>Gas ....................................................................................................................................... 105
2.7. Transferring Configuration to Other Instruments ...................................................................................... 106
3. OPERATING MODES, BASIC OPERATION, AND CONFIGURATIONS ........................ 107
3.1. STANDBY MODE...................................................................................................................................... 108
3.2. GENERATE MODE ................................................................................................................................... 109
3.2.1. GENERATE > AUTO: Basic Generation of Calibration Mixtures ...................................................... 112
3.2.2. GENERATE > MANUAL: Generating Calibration Mixtures Manually................................................ 114
3.2.2.1. Determining the Source Gas Flow Rate ..................................................................................... 116
3.2.2.2. Determining Diluent Flow Rate ................................................................................................... 117
3.2.2.3. Determining Diluent Flow Rate with O3 Generator Option Installed........................................... 117
3.2.2.4. Setting Source Gas and Diluent Flow Rates Using the GENERATE > MANual Menu.............. 118
3.2.3. GENERATE > PURGE: Activating the Calibrator’s Purge Feature ................................................... 118
3.2.4. GENERATE: Gas Phase Titration (GPT) Calibration ........................................................................ 119
3.2.4.1. Meeting the USEPA Guidelines for GPT calibration .................................................................. 119
3.2.4.2. GPT Theory ................................................................................................................................ 120
3.2.4.3. Determining the Total Flow for GPT Calibration Mixtures .......................................................... 120
3.2.5. GENERATE > GPTZ: Performing a Gas Phase Titration Zero ........................................................ 121
3.2.5.1. GPTZ vs Auto Generate Modes ................................................................................................. 122

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators xiii
 3.2.5.2. Calibrator GPTZ Operation ........................................................................................................ 122
3.2.5.3. Initiating a GPTZ......................................................................................................................... 123
3.2.6. GENERATE > GPTPS: Performing a Gas Phase Titration Pre-Set .................................................. 123
3.2.6.1. Calibrator GPTPS Operation ...................................................................................................... 124
3.2.6.2. Initiating a GPTPS ...................................................................................................................... 126
3.2.7. GENERATE > GPT: Performing a Gas Phase Titration .................................................................... 126
3.2.7.1. Calibrator GPT Operation ........................................................................................................... 126
3.2.7.2. Initiating a GPT Calibration Gas Generation .............................................................................. 128
3.2.8. GENERATE > SEQUENCE ............................................................................................................... 129
3.2.9. GENERATE > LEVEL ........................................................................................................................ 129
4. COMMUNICATIONS AND REMOTE OPERATION ......................................................... 130
4.1. Data Terminal/Communication Equipment (DTE DCE) ............................................................................ 130
4.2. Modes, Baud Rate and Serial Communication ......................................................................................... 130
4.2.1. Serial Communication: RS-232 ......................................................................................................... 130
4.2.2. Serial Communication: RS-485 (Option) ........................................................................................... 131
4.3. Ethernet ..................................................................................................................................................... 131
4.4. MODBUS Communications Protocol ........................................................................................................ 131
4.4.1.1. MODBUS Com Port Configuration ............................................................................................. 132
5. CALIBRATION AND VERIFICATION .............................................................................. 134
5.1. Verifying and Calibrating the MFCs .......................................................................................................... 134
5.1.1. Setup for Verifying and Calibrating the MFCs ................................................................................... 135
5.1.2. Verifying and Calibrating the MFCs ................................................................................................... 136
5.2. Verifying and Calibrating the O3 Photometer (Bench) Option ................................................................... 137
5.2.1. Setup for Verifying O3 Photometer (Option) Performance ................................................................. 138
5.2.2. Verifying O3 Photometer (Option) Performance ................................................................................ 138
5.2.3. Setup for Calibrating the O3 Photometer (Bench) Option .................................................................. 139
5.2.3.1. Setup Using Direct Connections ................................................................................................ 140
5.2.3.2. Setup Using a Calibration Manifold ............................................................................................ 141
5.2.3.3. Calibration Manifold Exhaust/Vent Line Requirements .............................................................. 141
5.2.4. Performing O3 Photometer (Option) Calibrations .............................................................................. 142
5.2.5. O3 Photometer Gas Flow Calibration ................................................................................................. 143
5.2.6. O3 Photometer Back Pressure Compensation Calibration ................................................................ 143
5.3. Verifying and Calibrating the O3 Generator Option ................................................................................... 144
5.3.1. Setup for Verification and Calibration the O3 Generator .................................................................... 144
5.3.2. Verifying O3 Generator Performance with External Photometer ....................................................... 144
5.3.3. O3 Generator Option with Photometer Calibration Procedure ........................................................... 145
5.4. Verifying and Calibrating the Gas Pressure Sensors................................................................................ 145
5.4.1.1. Calibrating Diluent, Cal Gas, or Opt O3 Generator Pressure Sensors ....................................... 147
5.4.1.2. Calibrating the Photometer (Option) Sample Gas Pressure Sensor .......................................... 148
6. MAINTENANCE 149
6.1. Maintenance Schedule .............................................................................................................................. 149
6.2. Operational Health Checks ....................................................................................................................... 151
6.3. Software/Firmware Updates ...................................................................................................................... 152
6.3.1. Remote Updates ................................................................................................................................ 152
6.3.2. Manual Reload/Update Procedures................................................................................................... 152
6.3.3. Instrument Display Calibration (for earlier instruments ...................................................................... 153
6.4. Time Zone Changes .................................................................................................................................. 154
6.5. Maintenance Procedures .......................................................................................................................... 155
6.5.1. Auto Leak Check................................................................................................................................ 155
6.5.1.1. Equipment Required ................................................................................................................... 155
6.5.1.2. Setup for Auto Leak Check ........................................................................................................ 155
6.5.1.3. Returning the Calibrator to Service after Performing an Auto Leak Check................................ 159
6.5.2. Cleaning or Replacing the Absorption Tube ...................................................................................... 159
6.5.3. UV Source Lamp Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 160
6.5.4. UV Source Lamp Replacement ......................................................................................................... 161

xiv Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 6.5.5. Ozone Generator UV Lamp Adjustment or Replacement ................................................................. 162
7. TROUBLESHOOTING AND SERVICE ............................................................................ 163
7.1. General Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................... 163
7.1.1. Fault Diagnosis with Alerts ................................................................................................................ 164
7.1.2. Fault Diagnosis With Dashboard Functions ...................................................................................... 165
7.1.3. Using the Signals for Diagnostic ........................................................................................................ 167
7.1.4. Using the Analog Outputs Menu ........................................................................................................ 167
7.2. Using the Internal Electronic Status LEDs ................................................................................................ 169
7.2.1. CPU Status Indicator ......................................................................................................................... 169
7.2.2. Relay PCA Status LEDs .................................................................................................................... 170
7.2.2.1. I2C Bus Watchdog Status LEDs ................................................................................................. 170
7.2.2.2. O3 Option Status LEDs ............................................................................................................... 170
7.2.3. Valve Driver PCA STATUS LEDs ...................................................................................................... 171
7.3. Subsystem Checkout ................................................................................................................................ 173
7.3.1. Verify Subsystem Calibration ............................................................................................................. 173
7.3.2. AC Main Power .................................................................................................................................. 173
7.3.3. DC Power Supply............................................................................................................................... 174
7.3.4. I2C Bus ............................................................................................................................................... 175
7.3.5. Touchscreen Interface ....................................................................................................................... 175
7.3.6. LCD Display Module .......................................................................................................................... 175
7.3.7. Relay PCA ......................................................................................................................................... 176
7.3.8. Valve Driver PCA ............................................................................................................................... 176
7.3.9. Input Gas Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly .................................................................................... 176
7.3.9.1. Basic PCA Operation.................................................................................................................. 176
7.3.9.2. Cal Gas Pressure Sensor ........................................................................................................... 176
7.3.9.3. Diluent Pressure Sensor............................................................................................................. 177
7.3.10. Photometer O3 Generator Pressure/Flow Sensor Assembly........................................................... 177
7.3.10.1. Basic PCA operation ................................................................................................................ 177
7.3.10.2. Photometer Pressure Sensor ................................................................................................... 177
7.3.10.3. O3 Generator Pressure Sensor ................................................................................................ 178
7.3.10.4. Photometer Flow Sensor .......................................................................................................... 178
7.3.11. Motherboard..................................................................................................................................... 178
7.3.11.1. A/D Functions ........................................................................................................................... 178
7.3.11.2. Analog Outputs Voltage Test ................................................................................................... 179
7.3.11.3. Digital (Status) Outputs ............................................................................................................ 180
7.3.11.4. Digital Control Inputs ................................................................................................................ 180
7.3.11.5. Control Outputs ........................................................................................................................ 181
7.3.12. CPU ................................................................................................................................................. 181
7.3.13. The Calibrator Doesn’t Appear on the Lan or Internet..................................................................... 182
7.3.14. RS-232 Communications ................................................................................................................. 182
7.3.14.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting............................................................................................. 182
7.3.15. Temperature Problems .................................................................................................................... 182
7.3.15.1. Box / Chassis Temperature ...................................................................................................... 183
7.3.15.2. Photometer Option Sample Chamber Temperature ................................................................ 183
7.3.15.3. UV Lamp Temperature ............................................................................................................. 183
7.3.15.4. Ozone Generator Temperature ................................................................................................ 183
7.4. TroubleShooting the Optional O3 Photometer .......................................................................................... 184
7.4.1. Dynamic Problems with the Optional O3 Photometer ........................................................................ 184
7.4.1.1. Noisy or Unstable O3 Readings at Zero ..................................................................................... 184
7.4.1.2. Noisy, Unstable, or Non-Linear Span O3 Readings ................................................................... 184
7.4.1.3. Slow Response to Changes in Concentration ............................................................................ 185
7.4.1.4. The Analog Output Signal Level Does Not Agree With Front Panel Readings.......................... 185
7.4.1.5. Cannot Zero ................................................................................................................................ 185
7.4.1.6. Cannot Span ............................................................................................................................... 185
7.4.2. Checking The UV Lamp Power Supply ............................................................................................. 186
7.5. TroubleShooting the Optional O3 generator .............................................................................................. 187

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators xv

 7.5.1. Checking The UV Source Lamp Power Supply ................................................................................. 187
7.6. Replacing the Disk-on-Module .................................................................................................................. 188
7.7. Technical Assistance ................................................................................................................................ 188
7.8. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) ........................................................................................................ 189
8. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION ........................................................................................ 190
8.1. Basic Principles of Dynamic Dilution Calibration ...................................................................................... 190
8.1.1. Gas Phase Titration Mixtures for O3 and NO2 ................................................................................... 191
8.2. Pneumatic Operation ................................................................................................................................ 192
8.2.1. Gas Flow Control ............................................................................................................................... 192
8.2.1.1. Diluent and Source Gas Flow Control ........................................................................................ 193
8.2.1.2. Flow Control Assemblies for Optional O3 Components ............................................................. 193
8.2.1.3. Critical Flow Orifices ................................................................................................................... 194
8.2.2. Internal Gas Pressure Sensors .......................................................................................................... 195
8.3. Electronic Operation .................................................................................................................................. 196
8.3.1. CPU ................................................................................................................................................... 198
8.3.2. Relay PCA ......................................................................................................................................... 199
8.3.2.1. Valve Control .............................................................................................................................. 199
8.3.2.2. Heater Control ............................................................................................................................ 200
8.3.2.3. Relay PCA Status LEDs & Watch Dog Circuitry ........................................................................ 200
8.3.2.4. Relay PCA Watchdog Indicator (D1) .......................................................................................... 201
8.3.3. Valve Driver PCA ............................................................................................................................... 202
8.3.3.1. Valve Driver PCA Watchdog Indicator (D2) ............................................................................... 202
8.3.4. Motherboard ....................................................................................................................................... 203
8.3.4.1. Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Conversion ............................................................................................ 203
8.3.4.2. Sensor Inputs ............................................................................................................................. 203
8.3.4.3. Thermistor Interface ................................................................................................................... 203
8.3.4.4. Analog Outputs ........................................................................................................................... 203
8.3.4.5. External Digital I/O ...................................................................................................................... 204
8.3.4.6. I2C Data Bus ............................................................................................................................... 204
8.3.4.7. Power-up Circuit ......................................................................................................................... 204
8.3.5. Input Gas Pressure Sensor PCA ....................................................................................................... 204
8.3.6. Power Supply and Circuit Breaker ..................................................................................................... 204
8.3.7. Front Panel Touchscreen/Display Interface ...................................................................................... 205
8.3.7.1. Front Panel Interface PCA ......................................................................................................... 206
8.4. Software Operation ................................................................................................................................... 207
8.5. O3 Generator Operation ............................................................................................................................ 208
8.5.1. Principle of Photolytic O3 Generation ................................................................................................ 208
8.5.2. O3 Generator – Pneumatic Operation ................................................................................................ 209
8.5.3. O3 Generator – Electronic Operation ................................................................................................. 210
8.5.3.1. O3 Generator Temperature Control ............................................................................................ 212
8.5.3.2. Pneumatic Sensor for the O3 Generator ..................................................................................... 212
8.6. Photometer Operation ............................................................................................................................... 212
8.6.1. Measurement Method ........................................................................................................................ 213
8.6.1.1. Calculating O3 Concentration ..................................................................................................... 213
8.6.1.2. The Measurement / Reference Cycle......................................................................................... 214
8.6.1.3. The Absorption Path ................................................................................................................... 216
8.6.1.4. Interferent Rejection ................................................................................................................... 216
8.6.2. Photometer Layout............................................................................................................................. 217
8.6.3. Photometer Pneumatic Operation ..................................................................................................... 217
8.6.4. Photometer Electronic Operation....................................................................................................... 218
8.6.4.1. O3 Photometer Temperature Control ......................................................................................... 219
8.6.4.2. Pneumatic Sensors for the O3 Photometer ................................................................................ 219

xvi Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 2-1. Calibrator Front Panel Layout .............................................................................................................. 32
Figure 2-2. Calibrator Rear Panel Layout ............................................................................................................... 33
Figure 2-3. Internal Layout, T700 Base Unit .......................................................................................................... 35
Figure 2-4. Internal Layout with O3 Generator and Photometer (options in T700, standard in T700U) ................. 36
Figure 2-5. Calibrator Analog Output Connector .................................................................................................... 38
Figure 2-6. Status Output Connector...................................................................................................................... 39
Figure 2-7. Calibrator Digital Control Input Connectors ......................................................................................... 40
Figure 2-8. Calibrator Digital Control Output Connector ........................................................................................ 41
Figure 2-9. Calibrator Rear Panel Valve Driver Installed (with PSM connected to JP1) ........................................ 42
Figure 2-10. Calibrator Rear Panel Valve Driver Installed (without PSM).............................................................. 42
Figure 2-11. Valve-Driver Interface ........................................................................................................................ 43
Figure 2-12. Option 48C Connections, Customer-supplied PSM to Pin 12 (+) & Pin 9 (-) .................................... 43
Figure 2-13. Option 48E Connections .................................................................................................................... 43
Figure 2-14. Rear Panel Connector Pin-Outs for RS-232 Mode ............................................................................ 45
Figure 2-15. Default Pin Assignments for CPU COMM Port Connector (RS-232). ............................................... 45
Figure 2-16. Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode ............................................................................................. 48
Figure 2-17. RS-232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram ........................................................... 49
Figure 2-18. Setup – Connecting the Basic Calibrator to a Sample Manifold ........................................................ 52
Figure 2-19. Setup – Connecting the Calibrator to a Sample Manifold .................................................................. 53
Figure 2-20. Setup – Connecting the Calibrator to a Calibration Manifold ............................................................. 54
Figure 2-21. Setup – Connecting the Calibrator to a Dual Span Gas / Zero Air Manifold...................................... 55
Figure 2-22. T700 Calibrator Pneumatic Diagram – Base Unit .............................................................................. 56
Figure 2-23. T700 Pneumatics for Calibrator with Optional O3 Generator and GPT Chamber ............................. 57
Figure 2-24. Pneumatics for T700U or for T700 with O3 Generator and Photometer Options .............................. 59
Figure 2-25. T700 Basic Calibrator with Multiple Calibration Gas MFCs ............................................................... 61
Figure 2-26. Pneumatics with AllOptions Installed (T700U, 3rd MFC; T700, O3 Generator, Photometer, and GPT
Chamber)........................................................................................................................................... 62
Figure 2-27. Permeation Tube Gas Generator Option ........................................................................................... 63
Figure 2-28. Pneumatic Flow with Permeation Generator ..................................................................................... 64
Figure 2-29. Rear Panel with Dual Output Option .................................................................................................. 67
Figure 2-30. T700 Internal Pneumatics with Optional Dual Gas Output (NOy – Special) ...................................... 68
Figure 2-31. T700U Pneumatic Diagram, with Dual Output and Three MFC Options ........................................... 68
Figure 2-32. Status Screens at Startup .................................................................................................................. 69
Figure 2-33. Typical Home Page Prior to Configuration......................................................................................... 69
Figure 2-34. Viewing Active Alerts Page ................................................................................................................ 70
Figure 2-35. Sample Dashboard Page ................................................................................................................... 71
Figure 2-36. Dashboard Configurator ..................................................................................................................... 71
Figure 2-37. Calibration Gas Inlet Ports Setup ....................................................................................................... 72
Figure 2-38. User Interface Orientation .................................................................................................................. 78
Figure 2-39. Dashboard Page ................................................................................................................................ 79
Figure 2-40. Viewing a Live Plot from Dashboard Page ........................................................................................ 79
Figure 2-41. Navigating to the Active Alerts Page.................................................................................................. 80
Figure 2-42. Active Alerts Cleared.......................................................................................................................... 81
Figure 2-43. Generate Page ................................................................................................................................... 81
Figure 2-44. USB Utilities Pages ............................................................................................................................ 82
Figure 2-45. DAS Download Page ......................................................................................................................... 83
Figure 2-46. Configuration Transfer ....................................................................................................................... 84
Figure 2-47. Sample Diagnostics Menu (differs by calibrator configuration) ......................................................... 85
Figure 2-48. Data Log Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 86
Figure 2-49. Datalog Periodic Trigger Configuration .............................................................................................. 87
Figure 2-50. Datalog - Conditional Trigger Configuration ...................................................................................... 88
Figure 2-51. USB Utility Page................................................................................................................................. 88
Figure 2-52. DAS Data Download .......................................................................................................................... 89
Figure 2-53. Events List .......................................................................................................................................... 89

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators xvii
Figure 2-54. Event Configuration............................................................................................................................ 90
Figure 2-55. Dashboard Configuration ................................................................................................................... 91
Figure 2-56. Vars Configuration ............................................................................................................................. 91
Figure 2-57. Homescreen Configuration ................................................................................................................ 92
Figure 2-58. Digital Outputs Setup ......................................................................................................................... 92
Figure 2-59. Sequence Configuration .................................................................................................................... 95
Figure 2-60. Sequence CC Inputs Setup Page ...................................................................................................... 96
Figure 2-61. Sequence CC Outputs Setup Page ................................................................................................... 97
Figure 2-62. Levels Programming and Editing ..................................................................................................... 100
Figure 2-63. Analog Output Configuration ............................................................................................................ 101
Figure 2-64. Setup for Calibrating the Analog Output Signals ............................................................................. 103
Figure 2-65. Communications Configuration, Network Settings .......................................................................... 105
Figure 2-66. Configuration Transfer ..................................................................................................................... 106
Figure 3-1. Gas Flow with O3 Generator and Photometer Options during Standby Mode .................................. 109
Figure 3-2. Gas Flow through Basic Calibrator in Generate Mode ...................................................................... 110
Figure 3-3. T700U Gas Flow and T700 with O3 Options when Generating Non-O3 Source Gas ........................ 111
Figure 3-4. T700U Gas Flow and T700 with O3 Options when Generating O3 .................................................... 111
Figure 3-5. Modes in the Generate Menu ............................................................................................................ 112
Figure 3-6. Auto Generate Calibration Mixtures ................................................................................................... 113
Figure 3-7. Generate>Manual Menu .................................................................................................................... 114
Figure 3-8. Generate>Manual with Ozone Generator .......................................................................................... 115
Figure 3-9. Gas Flow with O3 Options during Purge mode .................................................................................. 119
Figure 3-10. Gas Flow during GPTZ Mode .......................................................................................................... 123
Figure 3-11. Gas Flow during GPTPS Mode ........................................................................................................ 125
Figure 3-12. Gas Flow during GPT Mode ............................................................................................................ 127
Figure 4-1. MODBUS via Ethernet ....................................................................................................................... 132
Figure 4-2. MODBUS via Serial Communication (example) ................................................................................ 133
Figure 5-1. MFC Performance Statistics .............................................................................................................. 134
Figure 5-2. Location of MFC Outlet Ports ............................................................................................................. 136
Figure 5-3. MFC Calibration ................................................................................................................................. 137
Figure 5-4. Set up for Verifying Optional O3 Photometer Performance ............................................................... 138
Figure 5-5. O3 Photometer Performance Verification ........................................................................................... 139
Figure 5-6. External Photometer Validation Setup – Direct Connections ............................................................ 140
Figure 5-7. External Photometer Validation Setup with Calibration Manifolds ..................................................... 141
Figure 5-8. Bench Cal Page ................................................................................................................................. 142
Figure 5-9. Photometer Flow Calibration Screen ................................................................................................. 143
Figure 5-10. O3 Generator Calibration Setup – Direct Connections .................................................................... 144
Figure 5-11. Pressure Monitor Points in Basic Unit.............................................................................................. 146
Figure 5-12. Pressure Monitor Points with O3 Options and Multiple Cal MFCs Installed .................................... 146
Figure 5-13. Pressure Sensor Calibration Page (Diluent Example) ..................................................................... 147
Figure 5-14. O3 Photometer Pressure Sensor Calibration Page ......................................................................... 148
Figure 6-1. Report Generation Page .................................................................................................................... 151
Figure 6-2. Remote Update Page......................................................................................................................... 152
Figure 6-3. General Utilities Page ........................................................................................................................ 152
Figure 6-4. Touchscreen Calibration Page ........................................................................................................... 153
Figure 6-5. Time Zone Change Requirements ..................................................................................................... 154
Figure 6-6. Bypassing the Photometer Sensor PCA and Pump .......................................................................... 156
Figure 6-7. Gas Port Setup for Auto-Leak Check Procedure ............................................................................... 157
Figure 6-8. Gas Flow for Auto-Leak Check of Base Model Calibrators ............................................................... 158
Figure 6-9. Gas Flow for Auto-Leak Check of Calibrators with O3 Generator and Photometer Option ............... 158
Figure 6-10. Photometer Assembly – Lamp Adjustment / Installation ................................................................. 160
Figure 6-11. O3 Generator UV Lamp Location ..................................................................................................... 162
Figure 7-1. CPU Status Indicator.......................................................................................................................... 169
Figure 7-2. Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 170
Figure 7-3. Valve Driver PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting ................................................................ 171
Figure 7-4. Location of DC Power Test Points on Relay PCA ............................................................................. 174

xviii Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
Figure 7-5. Analog Outputs Page Example .......................................................................................................... 179
Figure 8-1. Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies with O3 Generator Installed ............................................. 194
Figure 8-2. Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice ................................................................................... 195
Figure 8-3. Electronic Block Diagram ................................................................................................................... 196
Figure 8-4. Calibrator CPU Board Annotated ....................................................................................................... 198
Figure 8-5. Relay PCA .......................................................................................................................................... 199
Figure 8-6. Heater Control Loop Block Diagram. ................................................................................................. 200
Figure 8-7. Status LED Locations – Relay PCA ................................................................................................... 200
Figure 8-8. Status LED Locations – Valve Driver PCA ........................................................................................ 202
Figure 8-9. Power Distribution Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 205
Figure 8-10. Front Panel Display Interface Block Diagram .................................................................................. 206
Figure 8-11. Schematic of Basic Software Operation .......................................................................................... 207
Figure 8-12. O3 Generator Internal Pneumatics ................................................................................................... 208
Figure 8-13. O3 Generator Valve and Gas Fixture Locations............................................................................... 210
Figure 8-14. O3 Generator – Electronic Block Diagram ....................................................................................... 211
Figure 8-15. O3 Generator Electronic Components Location ............................................................................... 211
Figure 8-16. O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations .................................................. 212
Figure 8-17. O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Measure Cycle ..................................................................................... 215
Figure 8-18. O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Reference Cycle .................................................................................. 215
Figure 8-19. O3 Photometer Absorption Path ....................................................................................................... 216
Figure 8-20. O3 Photometer Layout – Top Cover Removed ................................................................................ 217
Figure 8-21. O3 Photometer Electronic Block Diagram ........................................................................................ 218

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators xix
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1. Calibrator Options ................................................................................................................................. 23
Table 1-2. T700 Dilution System Specifications ..................................................................................................... 25
Table 1-3. T700 Electrical and Physical Specifications .......................................................................................... 26
Table 1-4. T700 Optional Ozone (O3) Generator** Specifications ......................................................................... 26
Table 1-5. T700 Optional UV Photometer Specifications ....................................................................................... 27
Table 1-6. T700U Dilution System Specifications .................................................................................................. 27
Table 1-7. T700U NO2 Generation (GPT modes) Specifications ........................................................................... 27
Table 1-8. T700U Ozone Generator Module Specifications .................................................................................. 27
Table 1-9. T700U UV Photometer Option Specifications ....................................................................................... 28
Table 1-10. T700U Electrical and Physical Specifications ..................................................................................... 28
Table 2-1. Instrument Ventilation Clearance Requirements .................................................................................. 31
Table 2-2. Rear Panel Description ......................................................................................................................... 34
Table 2-3. Status Output Pin Assignments ............................................................................................................ 39
Table 2-4. Calibrator Control Input Pin Assignments ............................................................................................. 40
Table 2-5. Calibrator Control Output Pin Assignments .......................................................................................... 41
Table 2-6. External Valve Driver Options ............................................................................................................... 42
Table 2-7. Operating Mode Valve States for Calibrator with O3 Generator ........................................................... 57
Table 2-8. Operating Mode Valve States for Standard T700U or for T700 with O3 Generator and Photometer
Options .............................................................................................................................................. 59
Table 2-9. Calibrator Gas Types ............................................................................................................................ 73
Table 2-10. Calibrator Units of Measure List .......................................................................................................... 73
Table 2-11. Menu Overview ................................................................................................................................... 75
Table 2-12. Calibration Sequences Configuration Attributes ................................................................................. 93
Table 2-13. Analog Output Voltage Range Min/Max ............................................................................................ 102
Table 2-14. Voltage Tolerances for the Analog Output Calibration...................................................................... 103
Table 2-15. COM1/COM2 Configuration .............................................................................................................. 104
Table 2-16. LAN/Ethernet Configuration Properties ............................................................................................. 105
Table 3-1. Calibrator Operating Modes ................................................................................................................ 107
Table 3-2. Status of Internal Pneumatics during STANDBY Mode ...................................................................... 108
Table 3-3. Status of Internal Pneumatics During Generate Mode ....................................................................... 110
Table 3-4. Internal Pneumatics during Purge Mode ............................................................................................. 118
Table 3-5. Status of Internal Pneumatics during GENERATE > GPTZ Mode ..................................................... 122
Table 3-6. Status of Internal Pneumatics during GENERATE > GPTPS Mode ................................................... 124
Table 3-7. Status of Internal Pneumatics during GENERATE > GPT Mode ........................................................ 126
Table 4-1. Ethernet Status Indicators ................................................................................................................... 131
Table 5-1. Examples of MFC Calibration Points .................................................................................................. 135
Table 5-2. Calibrator Pressure Sensor Calibration Setup .................................................................................... 145
Table 6-1. Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................................................................ 150
Table 7-1. Warning Messages in Alerts Page ...................................................................................................... 164
Table 7-2. Test Functions – Indicated Failures .................................................................................................... 166
Table 7-3. DIAG – Analog Output Functions ........................................................................................................ 168
Table 7-4. Dashboard Readings as Diagnostic Tools .......................................................................................... 168
Table 7-5. Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indications ................................................................................... 170
Table 7-6. Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications ......................................................................................... 170
Table 7-7. Valve Driver Board Watchdog LED Failure Indications ...................................................................... 171
Table 7-8. Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications ......................................................................................... 172
Table 7-9. DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes ................................................................................... 174
Table 7-10. DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels ................................................................................................ 175
Table 7-11. Relay PCA Control Devices .............................................................................................................. 176
Table 7-12. Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs ..................................................... 179
Table 7-13. Calibrator Control Input Pin Assignments and Digital Inputs Panel .................................................. 180
Table 7-14. Control Outputs Pin Assignments and Functions Check .................................................................. 181
Table 8-1. Relay PCA Status LEDs ...................................................................................................................... 201
Table 8-2. Calibrator Photometer Measurement / Reference Cycle .................................................................... 214

xx Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A – MODBUS Registers
APPENDIX B – Interconnect Diagram

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators xxi
1. INTRODUCTION, SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS
This Section provides an overview of the Dynamic Dilution Calibrator, its features, and its
options.

1.1. CALIBRATOR OVERVIEW

Teledyne API’s Model T700 and Model T700U are microprocessor-controlled, dynamic
dilution precision calibrators. The T700U is a modified version of the T700 calibrator, with
the ability to calibrate both standard and trace-level gas analyzers. Both use highly accurate
mass flow controllers, and while an ozone generator, photometer, and gas phase titration
(GPT) chamber are optional in the T700, they are standard in the T700U. Both models
essentially operate the same way and are referred to as “calibrator” or “this instrument” in
this manual, except where they differ, in which case the trace calibrator will be specified
by its model name, T700U.
Using a combination of highly accurate mass flow controllers and compressed sources of
standard gases, the calibrator provides calibration standards for multipoint span and zero
checks. Up to four gas sources may be used.
The calibrator can be equipped with an optional built-in, programmable ozone generator
for accurate, dependable ozone calibrations. The calibrator also produces NO2 when
blended with NO gas in the internal GPT chamber. A multi-point linearization curve is
used to control the generator to assure repeatable ozone concentrations. An optional
photometer allows precise control of the ozone generator, both during calibrations and
during GPTs. To ensure accurate NO2 output, the calibrator with photometer option
measures the ozone concentration prior to running a GPT.
Many independent calibration sequences may be programmed into the calibrator, covering
time periods of up to one year. The setup of sequences is simple and intuitive. These
sequences may be actuated manually, automatically, or by a remote signal. The sequences
may be uploaded remotely, including remote editing. All programs are maintained in non-
volatile memory.
The calibrator design emphasizes fast response, repeatability, overall accuracy and ease of
operation. It may be combined with the Model 701 Zero Air Generator to provide the
ultimate in easy-to-use, precise calibration for your gas calibrators.

1.2. FEATURES
Some of the exceptional features of your calibrator are:
• Advanced T-Series electronics
• LCD color graphics display with touch screen interface
• Microprocessor control for versatility
• Bi-directional USB (optional), RS-232, optional RS-485, and
10/100Base-T Ethernet for remote operation

22 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 • Precise calibration gas generation for O3, NO, NO2, CO, HC, H2S, SO2
• 12 independent timers for sequences
• Nested sequences (up to 5 levels)
• Software linearization of Mass Flow Controllers (MFC)
• 4 calibration gas ports configurable for single or multi-blend gases
• Optional 3rd MFC for wide dynamic range
• Optional gas phase titration (GPT) chamber
• Optional ozone generator and photometer to allow use as primary or
transfer standard
• Inlets for external ozone reference sources

1.3. OPTIONS
The options available for your analyzer are presented in Table 1-1 with name, option
number, a description and/or comments, and if applicable, cross-references to technical
details in this manual, such as setup and calibration. To order these options or to learn more
about them, please contact the Sales Department of Teledyne API at:
TOLL-FREE: +1 800-324-5190
PHONE: +1 858-657-9800
FAX: +1 858-657-9816
EMAIL: [email protected]
WEBSITE: http://www.teledyne-api.com/

Table 1-1. Calibrator Options

OPTION
OPTION DESCRIPTION/NOTES REFERENCE
NUMBER
Flow Options For mass flow control (MFC)
7A Source MFC 0-50 CC/MIN (Replaces 0-100 CC/MIN)
7B Source MFC 0-200 CC/MIN (Replaces 0-100 CC/MIN)
8A Diluent MFC 0-5 SLPM (Replaces 0-10 SLPM) Section 2.3.2.9
8B Diluent MFC 0-20 SLPM (Replaces 0-10 SLPM)
9 Third MFC (Can only be on source)
Calibration Options Gas generators
Internal Ozone (O3) Generator with
1A Section 2.3.2.9
Optical Feedback and GPT Mixing Chamber
UV Photometer Module (to increase accuracy of O3
2A Section 2.3.2.9
Generator, Option 1A)
5 Permeation Tube Oven Section 2.3.2.12
73 Dual Gas Output (NOy – special) Figure 2-29

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 23

 OPTION
OPTION DESCRIPTION/NOTES REFERENCE
NUMBER
Rack Mounting For mounting the analyzer in standard 19” racks
20A Rack mount brackets with 26 in. (660 mm) chassis slides N/A
20B Rack mount brackets with 24 in. (610 mm) chassis slides N/A
21 Rack mount brackets only N/A

CAUTION – GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD

THE CALIBRATOR WEIGHS CLOSE TO 18 KG (40 POUNDS) WITH ALL OPTIONS. TO AVOID
PERSONAL INJURY WE RECOMMEND THAT TWO PERSONS LIFT AND CARRY IT AFTER
DISCONNECTING ALL CABLES AND TUBING FROM THE CALIBRATOR BEFORE MOVING IT.
Parts Kits Spare parts and expendables for 1-year operation
46A Kit, Spares for One Unit (Technical Support)
46B Photometer Kit, Spares for One Unit (Technical Support)
46C Photometer W/ IZS Spares Kit For 1 Unit (Technical Support)
Communications For remote serial, network and Internet communication with the analyzer.
Type Description
Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-25M cable, about
60A RS-232 1.8 m long. Used to interface with older computers or Section 2.3.1.7
code activated switches with DB-25 serial connectors.
Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of about
60B RS-232 Section 2.3.1.7
Cables 1.8 m length.
Patch cable, 2 meters long, used for Internet and LAN
60C Ethernet Section 2.3.1.7,
communications.
Cable for direct connection between instrument (rear
60D USB Section 2.3.1.7
panel USB port) and personal computer.
USB Port 64A For rear panel connection to personal computer. Section 2.6.11
Multidrop/LVDS card seated on the analyzer’s CPU card.
RS-232 Multidrop 62 Each instrument in the multidrop network requires this card and a Section 2.3.1.7
communications cable (Option 60B).
External Valve Driver Capability - For driving up to eight, 8-watt valves
48C 12V External Valve Driver - without Power Supply Module
Section 2.3.1.6
48E 12V External Valve Driver - with Power Supply Module
NIST Traceable, Primary Standard Certification for use as a Primary Ozone Standard if purchased with the O3 generator
and photometer options, 1A and 2A, respectively.
95A Factory Calibration
95B Calibration as a Primary Standard Section 2.3.2.2
95C Calibration to NIST-SRP
For this application the Dynamic Dilution Calibrator’s performance is calibrated to Standard Reference Photometer (SRP).
Calibrators ordered with this option are verified and validated in accordance with procedures prescribed by the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) under Title 40 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Part 50, Appendix D.

24 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 OPTION
OPTION DESCRIPTION/NOTES REFERENCE
NUMBER
Special Features Built in features, software activated
Maintenance Mode Switch, located inside the instrument, places the
analyzer in maintenance mode where it can continue sampling, yet
ignore calibration, diagnostic, and reset instrument commands. This
N/A N/A
feature is of particular use for instruments connected to Multidrop or
Hessen protocol networks.
Call Technical Support for activation.
Second Language Switch activates an alternate set of display
messages in a language other than the instrument’s default
N/A language. N/A
Call Technical Support for a specially programmed Disk on Module containing
the second language.

1.4. T700 SPECIFICATIONS

All specifications are based on constant conditions.

Table 1-2. T700 Dilution System Specifications

PARAMETER SPECIFICATION
Flow Measurement Accuracy ± 1.0% of Full Scale
Repeatability of Flow Control ± 0.2% of Full Scale
Linearity of Flow Measurement ± 0.5% of Full Scale
Flow Range of Diluent Air 0 to 10 SLPM – Optional Ranges: 0 to 5 SLPM; 0 to 20 SLPM
Flow Range of Cylinder Gases * 0 to 100 cc/min – Optional Ranges: 0 to 50 cc/min; 0 to 200 cc/min (others available)
Zero Air Requirements 10 SLPM @ 30 PSIG – Optional: 20 SLPM @ 30 PSIG
CAL Gas Input Ports 4 (configurable for single or multi-blend gases)
Diluent Gas Input Port 1

* Can select two Cylinder Gas ranges with 3rd MFC Option for wider dynamic range

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 25

Table 1-3. T700 Electrical and Physical Specifications
PARAMETER SPECIFICATION
Rating Typical Power Consumption
AC Power
85V – 264V, 47Hz – 63Hz 115 V: 65 W 230 V: 60 W
Analog Outputs 1 user configurable output
Analog Output Ranges (Test 10V, 5V, 1V, 0.1V (selectable)
Channel) Range with 5% under/over-range
Analog Output Resolution 1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage (12 bit)
1 Ethernet: 10/100Base-T
2 RS-232 (300 – 115,200 baud)
2 USB device ports
Standard I/O
12 opto-isolated digital control outputs
12 opto-isolated digital control inputs
8 opto-isolated digital status outputs
1 USB com port
Optional I/O 1 RS485
Multidrop RS232
Operating Temperature Range 5-40ºC
Humidity Range 0 - 95% RH, non-condensing
Installation Category (Over Voltage Category ) II
Environmental Conditions Pollution Degree 2
Intended for Indoor Use Only at Altitudes ≤ 2000m
Cal Gas Output Wetted Surfaces: PTFE.
Materials
Cal Gas Output Manifold: Glass-coated Steel
Dimensions (H x W x D) 7” x 17” x 24” (178 mm x 432 mm x 609 mm)
31 lbs (14.06 kg);
Weight
39.2 lbs (17.78 kg) with photometer, GPT, and O3 generator options

Table 1-4. T700 Optional Ozone (O3) Generator** Specifications

PARAMETER SPECIFICATION
Maximum Output 6 ppm LPM
Minimum Output 100 ppb LPM
Response Time 180 seconds to 98%
Optical Feedback Standard
1% with photometer option
Stability (7 days)
3% without photometer option
1% with photometer option
Linearity
3% without photometer option
** GPT mixing chamber is included with the O3 Generator option

26 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

Table 1-5. T700 Optional UV Photometer Specifications
PARAMETER SPECIFICATION
Full Scale Range 0 - 100 ppb to 0 to 10 ppm User Selectable
Precision 1.0 ppb
Linearity 1.0% of reading
Rise/Fall Time < 20 sec (photometer response)
Response Time (95%) 180 sec (system response)
Zero Drift <1.0 ppb / 24 hours
Span Drift <1% / 24 hours
Minimum Gas Flow Required 800 cc/min

1.5. T700U SPECIFICATIONS

Table 1-6. T700U Dilution System Specifications
PARAMETER SPECIFICATION
Flow Measurement Accuracy ± 1.0% full Scale
Repeatability of Flow Control ± 0.2% full Scale
Linearity of Flow Measurement ± 0.5% full Scale
Flow Range of Diluent Air 0 to 10 SLPM – Optional Ranges: 0 to 5 SLPM; 0 to 20 SLPM (others available)
Flow Range of Cylinder Gases* 0 to 200 cc/min – Optional Ranges: 0 to 50 cc/min; 0 to 100 cc/min (others available)
Zero Air Required 10 SLPM @ 30 psi Optional: 20 SLPM @ 30 psi
CAL Gas Input Ports 4 (configurable)
Diluent Gas Input Ports 1
* Can select 3rd MFC Option for wider dynamic range

Table 1-7. T700U NO2 Generation (GPT modes) Specifications

PARAMETER SPECIFICATION
Minimum Output 20 ppb LPM
Minimum Concentration: 3 ppb
Precision ± 2.0% (with GPTPS)

Table 1-8. T700U Ozone Generator Module Specifications

PARAMETER SPECIFICATION
Maximum Output 6 ppm LPM
Minimum Output 20 ppb LPM
Minimum Ozone Concentration 3 ppb
Response Time 180 seconds to 98%
Optical Feedback Standard

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 27

Table 1-9. T700U UV Photometer Option Specifications
PARAMETER SPECIFICATION
Range 100 ppb to 10 ppm (selectable)
Precision 1.0 ppb
Linearity 1.0% of reading
Rise/Fall Time <20 seconds (photometer response)
Response Time 180 seconds to 95% (system response)
Zero Drift <1.0 ppb / 24 hours

Table 1-10. T700U Electrical and Physical Specifications

PARAMETER SPECIFICATION
Rating Typical Power Consumption
AC Power
100-240 V~ 50/60 Hz, 1.5 A 115 V: 76 W 230 V: 80 W
Analog Outputs 1 user configurable output
Analog Output Ranges 10V, 5V, 1V, 0.1V (selectable)
Analog Output Resolution 1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage (12 bit)
1 Ethernet: 10/100Base-T
2 RS-232 (300 – 115,200 baud)
2 USB device ports
Standard I/O
12 digital control outputs
12 digital control inputs
8 digital status outputs
1 USB com port
Optional I/O 1 RS485
Multidrop RS232
Operating Temperature Range 5 - 40ºC
Humidity Range 0 - 95% RH, non-condensing
Installation Category (Over Voltage Category ) II
Environmental Pollution Degree 2
Intended for Indoor Use Only at Altitudes ≤ 2000m
Dimensions (H x W x D) 7” x 17” x 24” (178 mm x 432 mm x 609 mm)
Weight 39.2 lbs (17.78 kg)

28 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

1.6. APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS
The Teledyne API Dynamic Dilution Calibrator was tested and certified for Safety and
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). This Section presents the compliance statements
for those requirements and directives.

1.6.1. SAFETY
IEC/EN 61010-1:2010 (3rd Edition), Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use.
CE: 2006/95/EU, Low-Voltage Directive

1.6.2. EMC
EN 61326-1 (IEC 61326-1), Class A Emissions/Industrial Immunity
FCC 47 CFR Part 15B, Class A Emissions
CE: 2004/108/EU, Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

1.6.3. OTHER TYPE CERTIFICATIONS

For information on other certifications, please contact the Technical Support Department:
+1 800-324-5190 (toll free), or +1 858-657-9800, or [email protected]

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 29

2. GETTING STARTED
This Section addresses the procedures for unpacking the instrument and inspecting for
damage, presents clearance specifications for proper ventilation, introduces the instrument
layout, then presents the procedures for getting started: making electrical and pneumatic
connections, and conducting an initial calibration check.

2.1. UNPACKING
CAUTION – RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY
The calibrator weighs about 18 kg (40 pounds) without options installed. To avoid
personal injury, always use two persons to lift and carry the calibrator.

ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY

Printed Circuit Assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-
static discharges too small to be felt by the human
nervous system. Failure to use ESD protection when
working with electronic assemblies will void the
instrument warranty. Refer to the manual, Fundamentals
of ESD, PN 04786, which can be downloaded from our
website at http://www.teledyne-api.com.

CAUTION – AVOID DAMAGE TO THE INSTRUMENT

BEFORE operating instrument, remove dust plugs from pneumatic ports.

Note Teledyne API recommends that you store shipping

containers and materials for future use if/when the
instrument should be returned to the factory for repair
and/or calibration service. See Warranty statement in this
manual and Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) on
our Website at http://www.teledyne-api.com.

WARNING!
Never disconnect electronic circuit boards, wiring harnesses or electronic
subassemblies while the unit is under power.

30 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 1. Inspect the received packages for external shipping damage. If damaged,
please advise the shipper first, then Teledyne API.
2. Included with your calibrator is a printed record of the final performance
characterization performed on your instrument at the factory. This record, titled
Final Calibrated Test and Validation Data Sheet, is an important quality
assurance and calibration record and should be placed in the quality records
file for this instrument.
3. Carefully remove the top cover of the calibrator and check for internal shipping
damage.
a. Remove the four screws located on the sides: two at front, two at rear.
b. Lift the cover straight up.
c. Inspect the interior of the instrument to ensure all circuit boards and
other components are intact and securely seated.
d. Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and
pneumatic hoses to ensure they are firmly and securely seated.
e. Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been
installed. (These are checked on the paperwork accompanying the
instrument).

2.1.1. VENTILATION CLEARANCE

Whether the instrument is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack, be sure to
leave sufficient ventilation clearance.

Table 2-1. Instrument Ventilation Clearance Requirements

AREA MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE
Behind the instrument 10 cm / 4 inches
Sides of the instrument 2.5 cm / 1 inch
Above and below the instrument 2.5 cm / 1 inch

Various rack mount kits are available for this instrument. See Table 1-1 of this manual for
more information.

2.2. INSTRUMENT LAYOUT

The front panel (Figure 2-1) has two USB ports for peripheral device connections: mouse
and keyboard as alternatives to the touchscreen interface, or flash drive for
uploads/downloads (devices not included).

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 31

 2.2.1. FRONT PANEL

Figure 2-1. Calibrator Front Panel Layout

CAUTION – AVOID DAMAGING TOUCHSCREEN

Do not use hard-surfaced instruments such as pens to operate the touch screen
buttons.

32 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 2.2.2. REAR PANEL

Figure 2-2. Calibrator Rear Panel Layout

Table 2-2 provides a description of the rear panel components.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 33

Table 2-2. Rear Panel Description
COMPONENT FUNCTION
Cooling fan Pulls ambient air into chassis through side vents and exhausting through rear.
Connector for three-prong cord to apply AC power to the analyzer
AC Power
CAUTION! The cord’s power specifications (specs) MUST comply with the power
Connector
specs on the calibrator’s rear panel Model number label.

* EXHAUST Exhaust gas from ozone generator and photometer

(option) CAUTION! Exhaust gas must be vented outside.

* PHOTOMETER INLET Measurement gas input for O3 photometer

(Photometer option)
* PHOTOMETER OUTLET Calibration gas outlet to O3 photometer
(Photometer option)
* PHOTO ZERO IN Inlet for photometer Zero Gas
(Photometer option)
* PHOTO ZERO OUT Outlet for photometer Zero Gas
(Photometer option)
DILUENT IN Diluent or zero air gas inlet.
CALGAS OUT Outlets for calibration gas
VENT Vent port for output manifold
CYL 1 thru CYL 4 Inlets for up to 4 calibration gases.
COM 2 Serial communications port for RS-232 or RS-485.
RX TX LEDs indicate receive (RX) and transmit (TX) activity on the when blinking.
RS-232 Serial communications port for RS-232 only.
Switch to select either data terminal equipment or data communication equipment
DCE DTE during RS-232 communication. (Section 4.1)
CONTROL OUT For outputs to devices such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).
STATUS For outputs to devices such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).
ANALOG OUT For voltage or current loop outputs to a strip chart recorder and/or a data logger.
CONTROL IN For remotely activating the zero and span calibration modes.
ETHERNET Connector for network or Internet remote communication, using Ethernet cable.
(optional) USB Connector for direct connection to a personal computer, using USB cable.
Model/specs label Identifies the analyzer model number and lists voltage and frequency specifications.
* Option in T700; standard in T700U

34 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 2.2.3. INTERNAL LAYOUT

Figure 2-3. Internal Layout, T700 Base Unit

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 35

 Figure 2-4. Internal Layout with O3 Generator and Photometer (options in T700, standard in T700U)

36 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

2.3. CONNECTIONS
This Section presents the electrical (Section 2.3.1) and pneumatic (Section 2.3.2)
connections for setting up and preparing the instrument for operation.

2.3.1. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Note To maintain compliance with EMC standards, it is required
that the cable length be no greater than 3 meters for all I/O
connections.

WARNING – ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

• High Voltages are present inside the instrument’s case.
• Power connection must have functioning ground connection.
• Do not defeat the ground wire on power plug.
• Turn off instrument power before disconnecting or connecting
electrical subassemblies.
• Do not operate with cover off.

CAUTION – AVOID DAMAGE TO THE INSTRUMENT

Ensure that the AC power voltage matches the voltage indicated on
the instrument’s model/specs label before plugging it into line
power.

2.3.1.1. CONNECTING POWER

Attach the power cord between the instrument’s AC power connector and a power outlet
capable of carrying at least the rated current at your AC voltage range. It is important to
adhere to all safety and cautionary messages, and ensure that the outlet is equipped with a
functioning earth ground.

CAUTION – AVOID PERSONAL INJURY

DO NOT look at the photometer UV lamp; UV light can cause eye
damage.
Always wear glasses made from Safety UV filtering glass
(plastic glasses are inadequate).

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 37

 2.3.1.2. CONNECTING ANALOG OUTPUTS
The calibrator is equipped with an analog output channel for one of several diagnostic
functions, and is accessible through the ANALOG OUT connector (Figure 2-5) on the rear
panel. Its standard available output is 0-5 VDC.
Attach a strip chart recorder or data-logger to the analog output connector. Configuration
information is presented in the Setup Section (Setup>Analog Outputs>, Section 2.6.9).
ANALOG OUT
+ –

Figure 2-5. Calibrator Analog Output Connector

2.3.1.3. CONNECTING THE STATUS OUTPUTS (DIGITAL OUTPUTS)

The 12-pin STATUS connector allows the digital status outputs to report up to eight , user-
selected calibrator conditions (configured through the Setup>Digital Outputs menu,
Section 2.6.6) via optically isolated NPN transistors, which sink up to 50 mA of DC
current. These outputs can be used to interface with devices that accept logic-level digital
inputs, such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs). Each Status bit is an open
collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC. All emitters of these transistors are tied
together and available at pin D (Figure 2-6).

ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY

Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the
current that the input will draw from an external device.
When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature,
an external dropping resistor must be used to limit the
current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA.
At 50 mA, the transistor will drop approximately 1.2V from
its collector to emitter.

38 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 STATUS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D +
User-selectable

User-selectable

User-selectable

User-selectable

User-selectable

User-selectable

User-selectable

User-selectable

EMITTER BUSS

+ 5 VDC

CALIBRATOR
INTERNAL GROUND
Figure 2-6. Status Output Connector

The pin assignments for the Status Outputs are:

Table 2-3. Status Output Pin Assignments

STATUS
OUTPUT # CONDITION
DEFINITION
1-8 User-Selectable On or off
D Emitter BUS The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 to 8 are bussed together.
(blank) (blank) Not Used
+ DC POWER + 5 VDC

Digital Ground The ground level from the calibrator’s internal DC power supplies.

2.3.1.4. CONNECTING THE CONTROL INPUTS (DIGITAL INPUTS)

The calibrator is equipped with 12 digital control inputs (two separate 10-pin connectors
on rear panel, labeled CONTROL IN), which can be used to initiate various user-
programmable calibration sequences (see Section 2.6.7.1 for instructions on assigning the
control inputs to specific calibration sequences).

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 39

 Example of Local Power Connections Example of External Power Connections

CONTROL Bit-01

CONTROL Bit-02

CONTROL Bit-03

CONTROL Bit-04

CONTROL Bit-05

CONTROL Bit-06

CONTROL Bit-01

CONTROL Bit-02

CONTROL Bit-03

CONTROL Bit-04

CONTROL Bit-05

CONTROL Bit-06
1 2 3 4 5 6 U + 1 2 3 4 5 6 U +

7 8 9 10 11 12 U + 7 8 9 10 11 12 U +

CONTROL Bit-07

CONTROL Bit-08

CONTROL Bit-09

CONTROL Bit-10

CONTROL Bit-11

CONTROL Bit-12
CONTROL Bit-07

CONTROL Bit-08

CONTROL Bit-09

CONTROL Bit-10

CONTROL Bit-11

CONTROL Bit-12

- 5 VDC Power +
Supply

Figure 2-7. Calibrator Digital Control Input Connectors

There are two methods for energizing the control inputs. The internal +5V available from
the pin labeled “+” is the most convenient method. However, if full isolation is required,
an external 5 VDC power supply should be used.

Table 2-4. Calibrator Control Input Pin Assignments

CONNECTOR INPUT DESCRIPTION
Can be used as either 6 separate on/off switches, or as bits 1 through 6 of a
Top 1 to 6 12-bit wide binary activation code.
Can be used as either 6 separate on/off switches, or as bits 7 through 12 of a
Bottom 7 to 12 12-bit wide binary activation code.
BOTH Chassis ground.
Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins 1 – 6. This can be from an
Top U external source or from the “+” pin of the connector.
Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins 7 – 12. This can be from an
Bottom U external source or from the “+” pin of the connector.
Internal source of +5V used to actuate control inputs when connected to the
BOTH + U pin.

40 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 2.3.1.5. CONNECTING THE DIGITAL CONTROL OUTPUTS
The calibrator is equipped with 12 opto-isolated, digital control outputs on a 14-pin
connector (Figure 2-8); see Figure 2-2 for rear panel location. These outputs may be used
to interface with devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as Programmable Logic
Controllers (plcs), data loggers, or digital relays/valve drivers, and are activated by the
calibrator’s user-programmable calibration sequences. Create the sequences in
Setup>Sequences menu; then map the digital control outputs to the sequences through the
Setup>Digital Outputs menu (see Section 2.6.7 for instructions on assigning the control
outputs to specific calibration sequences).

CONTROL OUT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 E

Figure 2-8. Calibrator Digital Control Output Connector

ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY

Most PLCs have internal provisions for limiting the current
the input will draw. When connecting to a unit that does
not have this feature, external resistors must be used to
limit the current through the individual transistor outputs
to ≤50mA (120 Ω for 5V supply).

The pin assignments for the control outputs are:

Table 2-5. Calibrator Control Output Pin Assignments

PIN # STATUS DEFINITION CONDITION
1 - 12 Outputs 1 through 12 respectively Closed if the sequence or sequence step activating output is operating.
E Emitter BUS The emitters of the transistors on pins 1 to 12 are bussed together.

Digital Ground The ground level from the calibrator’s internal DC power supplies.

2.3.1.6. CONNECTING THE EXTERNAL VALVE DRIVER OPTION

Two 12V external valve driver assemblies (options listed in Table 2-6), are available that
can drive up to eight, 8-watt valves based on the condition of the status block bits described
below. The option consists of a custom Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA) that mounts to the
back of the calibrator with or without a universal AC-to-DC power supply module (PSM).
The Valve Driver Outputs are mapped one-for-one to the Control Outputs 1 through 8 and
can be manually actuated for troubleshooting using the Signal I/O diagnostic function in
the calibrator software (see Section 7.3.11.5). However, the drive outputs are mapped in
reverse to the status control bits such that Bit-0 (LSB) is valve drive 8 and Bit-7 is valve
drive 1.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 41

 Figure 2-9. Calibrator Rear Panel Valve Driver Installed (with PSM connected to JP1)

Figure 2-10. Calibrator Rear Panel Valve Driver Installed (without PSM)

Table 2-6. External Valve Driver Options

OPTION DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
48C 12V External Valve Driver - without PSM 072210100
48E 12V External Valve Driver - with PSM 072210300

Depending upon the capacity of the external supply either four (standard) or eight valves
can be simultaneously energized.
The PCA is constructed such that it plugs through the rear panel into the Control Output
connector, J1008, on the calibrator’s motherboard.

42 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 Figure 2-11. Valve-Driver Interface

OPTION 48C CONNECTIONS

CAUTION – AVOID DAMAGE TO VALVE DRIVER BOARD
Do NOT connect power supply to JP1 for Options 48C or 48D.

Figure 2-12. Option 48C Connections, Customer-supplied PSM to Pin 12 (+) & Pin 9 (-)

OPTION 48E CONNECTIONS

Figure 2-13. Option 48E Connections

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 43

 2.3.1.7. CONNECTING THE COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES
The T-Series analyzers are equipped with connectors for remote communications
interfaces: Ethernet, USB (Option), RS-232, RS-232 Multidrop and RS-485 (each
described below). (Configuration details for Setup>Comm are presented in Section 2.6.11).

ETHERNET CONNECTION
For network or Internet communication with the analyzer, connect an Ethernet cable from
the analyzer’s rear panel Ethernet interface connector to an Ethernet port. Although the
analyzer is shipped with DHCP enabled by default, it should be manually assigned a static
IP address (Setup>Comm>Network Settings, Section 2.6.11.4).

USB (OPTION) CONNECTION

The rear panel USB option can be used for direct communication between the analyzer and
a PC; connect a USB cable between the analyzer and computer USB ports (ensure baud
rates match). A USB driver is required for complete configuration.

Note If this option is installed, the rear panel RS232 (COM2) port cannot
be used for anything other than Multidrop communication.

RS-232 CONNECTION
For RS-232 communications with data terminal equipment (DTE) or with data
communication equipment (DCE) connect either a DB9-female-to-DB9-female cable
(Teledyne API part number WR000077) or a DB9-female-to-DB25-male cable (Option
60A), as applicable, from the analyzer’s rear panel RS-232 port to the device. Adjust the
DCE-DTE switch (Figure 2-2) to select DTE or DCE as appropriate (Section 4.1).

Important IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA

Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching
connectors may incorporate internal wiring that makes the link
inoperable. Check cables acquired from sources other than
Teledyne API for pin assignments (Figure 2-14) before using.

RS-232 COM PORT CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS

Electronically, the difference between the DCE and DTE is the pin assignment of the Data
Receive and Data Transmit functions.
• DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3.
• DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.

44 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 Figure 2-14. Rear Panel Connector Pin-Outs for RS-232 Mode

The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring
harness to two 10-pin connectors on the CPU card, J11 and J12 (Figure 2-15).

Figure 2-15. Default Pin Assignments for CPU COMM Port Connector (RS-232).

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 45

 Teledyne API offers two mating cables, one of which should be applicable for your use.
P/N WR000077, a DB-9 female to DB-9 female cable, 6 feet long. Allows connection of
the serial ports of most personal computers.

P/N WR000024, a DB-9 female to DB-25 male cable. Allows connection to the most
common styles of modems (e.g. Hayes-compatible) and code activated switches.

Both cables are configured with straight-through wiring and should require no additional
adapters

Note Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching

connectors may incorporate internal wiring that makes the
link inoperable. Check cables acquired from sources other
than Teledyne API for pin assignments before using.

To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem, there are
activity indicators just above the RS-232 port. Once a cable is connected between the
analyzer and a computer or modem, both the red and green LEDs should be on.
• If the lights are not lit, locate the small switch on the rear panel to switch
it between DTE and DCE modes.
• If both LEDs are still not illuminated, ensure that the cable properly
constructed.

RS-232 COM PORT DEFAULT SETTINGS

Received from the factory, the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem, with Pin 3
of the DB-9 connector designated for receiving data and Pin 2 designated for sending data.
• RS-232 (COM1): RS-232 (fixed) DB-9 male connector
Baud rate: 115200 bits per second (baud)
Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit
Parity: None
• COM2: RS-232 (configurable to RS-485), DB-9 female connector
Baud rate: 19200 bits per second (baud)
Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit
Parity: None

46 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 RS-232 MULTI-DROP (OPTION 62) CONNECTION
When the RS-232 Multidrop option is installed, connection adjustments and configuration
through the menu system are required. This Section provides instructions for the internal
connection adjustments, then for external connections, and ends with instructions for
menu-driven configuration.

Note Because the RS-232 Multidrop option uses both the RS232
and COM2 DB9 connectors on the analyzer’s rear panel to
connect the chain of instruments, COM2 port is no longer
available for separate RS-232 or RS-485 operation.

ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY

Printed Circuit Assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-
static discharges too small to be felt by the human
nervous system. Failure to use ESD protection when
working with electronic assemblies will void the
instrument warranty. For more information on preventing
ESD damage, see A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge;
the manual can be downloaded from our website at
http://www.teledyne-api.com under Help Center > Product
Manuals in the Special Manuals section.

In each instrument with the Multidrop option there is a shunt jumpering two pins on the
serial Multidrop and LVDS printed circuit assembly (PCA), as shown in Figure 2-16. This
shunt must be removed from all instruments except that designated as last in the multidrop
chain, which must remain terminated. This requires powering off and opening each
instrument and making the following adjustments:

1. With NO power to the instrument, remove its top cover and lay the rear panel open
for access to the Multidrop/LVDS PCA, which is seated on the CPU.

2. On the Multidrop/LVDS PCA’s JP2 connector, remove the shunt that jumpers Pins
21 ↔ 22 as indicated in Figure 2-16. (Do this for all but the last instrument in the
chain where the shunt should remain at Pins 21 ↔ 22).

3. Check that the following cable connections are made in all instruments (again refer
to Figure 2-16):
• J3 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to the CPU’s COM1 connector
(Be aware that the CPU’s COM2 connector is not used in Multidrop)
• J4 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to J12 on the motherboard
• J1 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCS to the front panel LCD

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 47

 Figure 2-16. Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode

Note If you are adding an instrument to the end of a previously

configured chain, remove the shunt between Pins 21 ↔ 22
of JP2 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA in the instrument that
was previously the last instrument in the chain.

4. Close the instrument.

5. Referring to Figure 2-17, use straight-through DB9 male > DB9 female cables to
interconnect the host RS232 port to the first analyzer’s RS232 port. Do the same
from the first analyzer’s COM2 port to the second analyzer’s RS232 port, and from
the second analyzer’s COM2 port to the third analyzer’s RS232 port, etc. Connect
in this fashion up to eight analyzers, subject to the distance limitations of the RS-
232 standard.

6. On the rear panel of each analyzer, adjust the DCE DTE switch (see Figure
2-2 and Section 4.1) so that the green and the red LEDs (RX and TX) of the
COM1 connector (labeled RS232) are both lit. (Ensure you are using the
correct RS-232 cables internally wired specifically for RS-232
communication; see Table 1-1, “Communication Cables” and Section 2.3.1.7,
Connecting the Communications Interfaces, “RS-232 Connection”).

48 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 Female DB9
Host
Male DB9
RS-232 port

Analyzer Analyzer Analyzer Last Analyzer

COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2

RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232

Ensure jumper is
installed between
JP2 pins 21 ↔ 22 in
last instrument of
multidrop chain.

Figure 2-17. RS-232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram

7. BEFORE communicating from the host, power on the instruments and check that
the Machine ID code is unique for each:

a. In the Setup>Vars menu, check Instrument ID in the list of variables.

b. To change, select the variable and press the Edit button.

c. Once changed, press the Enter button to accept the new ID for that instrument.

8. Next, in the Setup>Comm>>COM1 menu (do not use the COM2 menu for
multidrop), use the Edit button to set COM1 Quiet Mode and COM1 Multidrop to
ENABLED; then press the Accept button.

9. Also check the COM1 Baud Rate to ensure it reads the same for all instruments
(edit as needed and press the Accept button).

Note The (communication) Host instrument can address only

one instrument at a time, each by its unique ID.

Note Teledyne API recommends setting up the first link,

between the Host and the first analyzer, and testing it
before setting up the rest of the chain.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 49

 RS-485 CONNECTION
As delivered from the factory, COM2 is configured for RS-232 communication but can be
reconfigured for operation as a non-isolated, half-duplex RS-485 port. Using COM2 for
RS-485 communication disables the USB port. To reconfigure this port for RS-485
communication, please contact the factory.

2.3.2. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS

Important IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Each time the pneumatic configuration is changed for any purpose
(whether locally to the instrument or to the sampling system), a
back pressure compensation calibration must be performed
(Section 5.2.6).

2.3.2.1. IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT DILUENT GAS (ZERO AIR)

Zero Air is similar in chemical composition to the Earth’s atmosphere but scrubbed of all
components that might affect the calibrator’s readings.
• Diluent Air should be dry (approximately -20ºC of Dew Point).
• Diluent Air should be supplied at a gas pressure of between 25 PSI and 35
PSI with a flow greater than the flow rate for the calibrator. For the standard
unit this means greater than 10 SLPM.
• For calibrators with the 20 LPM diluent flow option (OPT) the diluent air should
be supplied at a gas pressure of between 30 PSI and 35 PSI.
• Calibrators with optional O3 generators installed require that the zero air
source supply gas be flowing at a continuous rate of at least 100 cm3/min.
• If the calibrator is also equipped with an internal photometer, the zero air
source supply gas must be capable of a continuous rate of flow of at least 1.1
LPM.
Zero Air can be purchased in pressurized canisters or created using Teledyne API’s Model
701 Zero Air Generator.

2.3.2.2. IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT CALIBRATION GAS

Calibration gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type
of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range. Usually it is a
single gas type mixed with N2 although bottles containing multiple mixtures of compatible
gases are also available (e.g. H2S, O2 and CO mixed with N2).
• Calibration gas should be supplied at a pressure of between 25 PSI and 35
PSI with a flow greater than the flow rate for the calibrator.

NIST TRACEABLE CALIBRATION GAS STANDARDS

All calibration gases should be verified against standards of the National Institute for
Standards and Technology (NIST). To ensure NIST traceability, we recommend acquiring
cylinders of working gases that are certified to be traceable to NIST Standard Reference
Materials (SRM). These are available from a variety of commercial sources.

50 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 MINIMUM CALIBRATION GAS SOURCE CONCENTRATION
Determining minimum Cal Gas Concentration to determine the minimum concentration of
a calibration gas required by your system:
1. Determine the Total Flow required by your system by adding the gas flow requirement of
each of the analyzers in the system.
2. Multiply this by 1.5.
3. Decide on a Calibration Gas flow rate.
4. Determine the Calibration Gas ratio by divide the Total Flow by the Calibration Gas Flow
Rate.
5. Multiply the desired target calibration gas concentration by the result from step 4.
EXAMPLE. Your system has two analyzers each requiring 2SLPM of cal gas flow.
2SLPM + 2SLPM = 4SLPM
4SLPM x 1.5 = 6SLPM = Total Gas Flow Rate
• If the Calibrator’s cal gas flow rate is 2SLPM (therefore the Diluent Flow
Rate would need to be set at 4 SLPM) the Calibration Gas ratio would be:
• 6SLPMm ÷ 2SLPM = 3:1
• Therefore if your Target Calibration Gas Concentration is intended to be 200
ppm, the minimum required source gas concentration for this system
operating at these flow rates would be:
3 x 200ppm = 600 ppm

2.3.2.3. CONNECTING DILUENT SOURCE GAS TO THE CALIBRATOR

Use the fittings provided with the calibrator to connect the zero air source line to the port
labeled DILUENT IN.
• Ensure to initially finger tighten.
• Then use a properly sized wrench to make an additional 1 and 1/4 turn.

2.3.2.4. CONNECTING CALIBRATION SOURCE GAS TO THE CALIBRATOR

Connect the source gas line(s) to the ports labeled CYL1 through CYL4 on the calibrator’s
rear panel (see Figure 2-2).
• Source gas delivery pressure should be regulated between 25 PSI to 30
PSI.
• Use stainless steel tubing with a 1/8 inch outer diameter.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 51

 2.3.2.5. SETUP FOR DIRECT CONNECTIONS TO OTHER INSTRUMENTS
Use this setup for connecting the calibrator directly to other instruments without the use of
any shared manifolds.

Must be vented with at least 3 ft of 1/4 inch

tubing. If the gas flow on this line is ≥ 5 SLPM
the minimum O.D. must be 3/8 inch.

CYL1 VENT
CYL2 CAL OUT
CYL3 Sample Inlet
CAL OUT
CYL4
Teledyne API
Mass Flow Gas Analyzer
DILUENT IN
Calibrator

Enclosure Wall
Teledyne API Sample Inlet
CAL
MODEL 701
SOURCE Zero Gas Generator
GAS Teledyne API
Gas Analyzer
If no second Instrument is connected
to this outlet, it MUST be capped

Figure 2-18. Setup – Connecting the Basic Calibrator to a Sample Manifold

To determine if the gas flow on the vent line is ≥ 5 SLPM, subtract the gas flow for each
instrument connected to the outlets of the calibrator from the TOTAL FLOW setting for
the calibrator (see Section 2.4.5).
If the calibrator has the optional O3 photometer installed remember that this option requires
800 cc/min (0.8 LPM) of additional flow (see Section 2.4.5 or Figure 2-24).
EXAMPLE. Your system has two analyzers each requiring 2 SLPM of cal gas flow, and
the calibrator includes the O3 photometer. If the TOTAL FLOW rate for the
calibrator is set at 10 SLPM:

10LPM - 2LPM - 2LPM - 0.8 LPM = 5.2LPM

Therefore, the vent would require a gas line with an O.D. 3/8 inch.

52 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 2.3.2.6. CONNECTING THE CALIBRATOR TO A SAMPLE GAS MANIFOLD
Use this setup when connecting the calibrator to an analyzer network using a sample
manifold. In this case, the sampling cane and the manifold itself act as the T700’s vent.

SAMPLING CANE
FILTER SCREEN
BLOWER / PUMP

SAMPLE
MANIFOLD

ROOF VENT TO OUTSIDE OF ROOM

TEE

H2O TRAP

T700 output flow rate Sample Inlet

must be greater than the Exhaust
Total Flow requirements
of the entire system, Teledyne API
whichever is higher. Gas Analyzer
Minimum O.D. of this gas line
Sample Inlet
must be 3/8 inch
Exhaust
CAL OUT CYL1

CAL OUT
CYL2 Teledyne API
CYL3 Gas Analyzer
VENT
CYL4

Mass Flow
DILUENT IN
Calibrator
VENT & extra
CAL OUT Teledyne API MODEL
gas outlets
MUST be capped 701
Zero Gas Generator CAL
SOURCE
GAS

Figure 2-19. Setup – Connecting the Calibrator to a Sample Manifold

Note This is the recommended method for connecting the

calibrator to a system with analyzers that DO NOT have
internal zero/span valves.
The manifolds as shown in the above drawing are oriented
to simplify the drawing. Their actual orientation in your
set-up is with the ports facing upward. All unused ports
must be capped.
When initiating calibration, wait a minimum of 15 minutes
for the calibrator to flood the entire sampling system with
calibration gas.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 53

 2.3.2.7. CONNECTING THE CALIBRATOR TO A CALIBRATION MANIFOLD
Using a calibration manifold provides a pneumatic interface between the calibration system
and other devices (or systems) which use the calibrator’s gas output. Calibration manifolds
usually have one or more ports for connections to other external devices (such as an
analyzer).

SAMPLING CANE
FILTER SCREEN
BLOWER / PUMP

SAMPLE
MANIFOLD

ROOF VENT TO OUTSIDE OF ROOM

TEE

H2O TRAP
Sample Inlet

Span Gas Inlet

Zero Air Inlet

VENT & extra CAL OUT gas
outlets MUST be capped Teledyne API
Gas Analyzer

CYL1 VENT
Sample Inlet
CYL2
CAL OUT
Span Gas Inlet
CYL3
CAL OUT
CYL4 Zero Air Inlet

Teledyne API
Mass Flow Gas Analyzer
DILUENT IN
Calibrator

Teledyne API
CAL
MODEL 701
SOURCE Zero Gas Generator CALIBRATION
GAS MANIFOLD If Gas flow on this line is ≥ 5 SLPM
the minimum O.D. must be 3/8 inch
T700 output flow rate must be greater than 5 SLPM.
Minimum O.D. must be 3/8 inch

Figure 2-20. Setup – Connecting the Calibrator to a Calibration Manifold

Note This method requires that analyzers connected to the

calibration system have internal zero/span valves.
Keep the manifold as clean as possible to avoid loss of
sample gas flow from blockages or constrictions.
The manifolds as shown in the above drawing are oriented
to simplify the drawing. Their actual orientation in your
set-up is with the ports facing upward. All unused ports
must be capped.
When initiating calibration, wait a minimum of 15 minutes
for the calibrator to flood the entire calibration manifold
with calibration gas.

54 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 CALIBRATION MANIFOLD EXHAUST/VENT LINE
The calibration manifold’s excess gas should be vented outside of the room. This vent
should have an internal diameter large enough to avoid any appreciable pressure drop, and
it must be located sufficiently downstream of the output ports to assure that no ambient air
enters the manifold due to eddy currents or back diffusion.

2.3.2.8. CONNECTING THE CALIBRATOR TO A DUAL SPAN GAS / ZERO AIR

CALIBRATION MANIFOLD
Another type of calibration setup utilizes separate span gas and the zero air manifolds (see
Figure 2-21).
SAMPLING CANE
FILTER SCREEN
BLOWER / PUMP

SAMPLE
ROOF MANIFOLD VENT TO OUTSIDE OF ROOM

TEE

H2O TRAP
Sample Inlet

Exhaust

Span Gas Inlet

Zero Air Inlet

Teledyne API
Gas Analyzer
VENT & extra CAL OUT gas
outlets MUST be capped
Sample Inlet

Exhaust
CYL1 VENT
Span Gas Inlet
CYL2
CAL OUT
CYL3 Zero Air Inlet
CAL OUT Teledyne API
CYL4 1 Gas Analyzer
Mass Flow
DILUENT IN
Calibrator
SPAN CAL MANIFOLD

CAL 1
Teledyne API
SOURCE MODEL 701 ZERO CAL MANIFOLD
GAS Zero Gas Generator
5 SLPM
If Gas flow on these lines is ≥ 5 SLPM
1 the minimum O.D. must be 3/8 inch

Figure 2-21. Setup – Connecting the Calibrator to a Dual Span Gas / Zero Air Manifold

Note This set up is subject to the same notes and conditions as

the single calibration manifold described previously with
the following two exceptions:
• The calibrator’s total gas flow rate (Cal Gas Flow Rate +
Diluent Flow Rate) out should be greater than the Total
Flow requirements of the entire system.
• The manifolds as shown in the above drawing are
oriented to simplify the drawing. Their actual orientation
in your set-up is with the ports facing upward. All
unused ports must be capped.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 55

 SPAN GAS/ZERO AIR CALIBRATION MANIFOLD EXHAUST/VENT LINES
The span and zero air manifolds’ excess gas should be vented to a suitable vent outside of
the room. This vent should have an internal diameter large enough to avoid any appreciable
pressure drop, and it must be located sufficiently downstream of the output ports to assure
that no ambient air enters the manifold due to eddy currents or back diffusion.

Instrument Chassis

DILUENT On Back Panel

INLET
PHOTOMETER
INLET
DILUENT
brn
Valve
PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN
brn

Purge
Valve PHOTOMETER
brn ZERO OUT
DILUENT
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE

INLET SENSOR EXHAUST
INPUT GAS

Diluent
Mass Flow Controller
PCA

CAL GAS 2 PHOTOMETER

INLET OUTLET
CAL GAS
PRESSURE
SENSOR CAL GAS
CAL GAS 3 OUTPUT 1
INLET
orn
CAL GAS
orn OUTPUT 2
CAL GAS 4 yel
INLET
yel blu
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD VENT
yel blu
(on back panel) yel
Cal Gas GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD
Mass Flow Controller

Figure 2-22. T700 Calibrator Pneumatic Diagram – Base Unit

The standard calibrator is equipped with one calibration gas mass flow controller (flow rate
0 – 100 cm3/min) and one diluent gas mass flow controller (flow rate 0-10 LPM). See Table
1-1 for the various flow rate options.

2.3.2.9. T700 PNEUMATIC FLOW FOR O3 GENERATOR OPTION

Because ozone (O3) quickly breaks down into molecular oxygen (O2), this calibration gas
cannot be supplied in precisely calibrated bottles like other gases such as SO2, CO, CO2
NO, H2S, etc. The internal O3 generator extends the capabilities of the calibrator to
dynamically generate calibration gas mixtures containing O3.
Also, Gas Phase Titration (GPT) mixing chamber is included with the O3 generator. This
chamber, in combination with the O3 generator, allows the calibrator to use the GPT
technique to more precisely create NO2 calibration mixtures

56 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 Instrument Chassis

GENERATOR
O3 GAS INPUT

(option)

O3 Generator Assembly
PRESSURE SENSOR

O3
Pressure O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
Regulator
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA
DILUENT grn
INLET grn

(100 cm3/min)
Flow Control
DILUENT
Valve brn
On Back Panel
PHOTOMETER
Purge brn INLET
Valve
brn
DILUENT blk PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE

INLET SENSOR O3 Gen
Diluent
INPUT GAS

Valve PHOTOMETER
Mass Flow Controller ZERO OUT
PCA

red
CAL GAS 2
INLET
CAL GAS blk
EXHAUST
PRESSURE
CAL GAS 3 SENSOR blu
INLET GPT
orn PHOTOMETER
Valve OUTLET

CAL GAS 4 orn

INLET CAL GAS
yel
yel red OUTPUT 1
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel) yel
Cal Gas CAL GAS
Mass Flow Controller OUTPUT 2

GPT blu
Volume blu
VENT

GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 2-23. T700 Pneumatics for Calibrator with Optional O3 Generator and GPT Chamber

Table 2-7. Operating Mode Valve States for Calibrator with O3 Generator
VALVES MFCS
(X = CLOSED; O = OPEN)
MODE
CYL CYL CYL O3
CYL2 PURGE DILUENT GPT CAL1 CAL21 DILUENT
1 3 4 GEN

Generate Source Gas O2 O2 O2 O2 X O X X ON3 ON3 ON

Generate O3 X X X X X O X O OFF OFF OFF
Leak Check 0-17% X X X X O O X X ON ON ON
Leak Check 17%-100% X X X X O X X X ON ON ON
GPT O 2
O 2
O 2
O 2
X O O O ON 3
ON 3
ON
GPTPS X X X X X O O O OFF OFF ON
PURGE X X X X O O O O ON3 ON3 ON
STANDBY X X X X X O X X OFF OFF OFF
1
Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.
2
The valve associated with the cylinder containing the chosen source gas is open.
3
In instruments with multiple MFCs the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 57

 The output of the O3 generator can be controlled in one of two modes, depending on the
calibrator’s configuration at the factory: it will have either a choice between Constant and
Bench modes or a choice between Constant and Reference modes.
• CONSTANT mode: In this mode, the user selects a specific, constant
drive voltage (corresponding to a specific O3 concentration) for the
generator, or;
• BENCH mode: In this mode, the O3 concentration control loop uses the
photometer’s O3 measurement as input, and the bench feedback control
will take over and adjust the O3 generator drive voltage to match the
requested concentration.
• REFERENCE mode: In this mode, the user selects a desired O3
concentration whereby the calibrator’s CPU sets the intensity of the O3
generator’s UV lamp, corresponding to that concentration. The voltage
output of a reference detector, also internal to the generator, is digitized
and sent to the T700’s CPU where it is used as input for a control loop
that maintains the intensity of the UV lamp at a level appropriate for the
chosen set point.
See Section 8.5 for more details on the operation of the O3 generator.
In addition to the diluent gas, calibration source gas, and gas output connections discussed
in the preceding sections, this option requires an O3 exhaust line be connected to the
EXHAUST outlet on the calibrator’s rear panel (see Figure 2-2).

Note The EXHAUST line must be vented to atmospheric

pressure using a maximum of 10 meters of ¼” PTFE
tubing.
Venting must be outside the shelter or immediate area
surrounding the instrument.

2.3.2.10. T700 PNEUMATIC FLOW FOR O3 GENERATOR WITH PHOTOMETER OPTION

The photometer option, which includes the Ozone Generator, increases the accuracy of the
calibrator’s optional O3 generator (OPT 1A) by directly measuring O3 content of the gas
output by the generator. It uses a more precise and stabile feature called the BENCH
feedback mode, which controls the output of the O3 generator. In BENCH mode the
intensity of the O3 generator’s UV lamp is controlled (and therefore the concentration of
the O3 created) by the calibrator’s CPU based on the actual O3 concentration measurements
made by the photometer.
See Section 8.6 for more details on the operation of the O3 photometer.

58 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 Instrument Chassis

Flow Control
PHOTOMETER BENCH
(1.0 LPM) (option)
gry

O3 FLOW
SENSOR
Pressure
Regulator O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR

GENERATOR
DILUENT

O3 Generator Assembly
INLET grn grn PHOTOMETER

(option)
PRESSURE SENSOR On Back Panel
DILUENT

O3
Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA vio PHOTOMETER
INLET
brn
Flow Control REF/MEAS vio
Valve
(800 cm3)

Flow Control
Purge brn brn

(100 cm3)
Valve
wht
DILUENT Diluent PUMP wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE ZERO IN

Mass Flow Controller
INLET SENSOR
INPUT GAS

PHOTOMETER
O3 Gen
PCA

ZERO OUT
Valve gry
CAL GAS 2
INLET
INTERNAL
CAL GAS blk VENT
PRESSURE red
CAL GAS 3 SENSOR
blk
INLET EXHAUST
GPT
orn
Valve
CAL GAS 4
orn
PHOTOMETER
INLET OUTLET
yel
yel red
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel) yel CAL GAS
Cal Gas OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
GPT blu
OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 2-24. Pneumatics for T700U or for T700 with O3 Generator and Photometer Options

Table 2-8. Operating Mode Valve States for Standard T700U or for T700 with O3 Generator and
Photometer Options
VALVES MFCS
PHOT
(X = CLOSED; O = OPEN) PUMP
GAS TYPE
CYL CYL CYL CYL O3
PURGE DILUENT GPT PHOT M/R CAL1 CAL21 DILUENT
1 2 3 4 GEN
Generate
Source Gas
O2 O2 O2 O2 X O X X Reference Phase ON3 ON3 ON OFF

Generate O3 X X X X X O X O Switching OFF OFF OFF ON4

Leak Check 0-
17% X X X X O O X X ON ON ON
Leak Check
17%-100% X X X X O X X X ON ON ON
GPT O2 O2 O2 O2 X O O O Reference Phase ON 3
ON 3
ON OFF
GPTPS X X X X X O O O Switching OFF OFF ON ON4
PURGE X X X X O O O O Reference Phase ON 3
ON 3
ON OFF
STANDBY X X X X X O X X Reference Phase OFF OFF OFF OFF
1
Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.
2
The valve associated with the cylinder containing the chosen source gas is open.
3
In an instrument with multiple MFCs the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested.
4
When generating O3 or in GPT Pre-Set mode, the photometer pump is the primary creator of gas flow through the calibrator. Flow rates are controlled by critical
flow orifice(s) located in the gas stream

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 59

 In addition to the connections discussed in the previous sections, this configuration has the
following requirements:
• Loop back lines must be connected between:
 PHOTOMETER OUTLET fixture and the PHOTOMETER INLET fixture
 PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT fixture and the PHOTOMETER ZERO IN fixture
• An O3 exhaust line must be connected to the EXHAUST outlet.
See Figure 2-2 for the location of these fixtures.

Note The EXHAUST line must be vented to atmospheric

pressure using a maximum of 10 meters of ¼” PTFE
tubing. This venting must be outside the shelter or
immediate area surrounding the instrument.

2.3.2.11. T700 PNEUMATIC FLOW FOR MULTIPLE CALIBRATION SOURCE GAS MFCS
When the optional third mass flow controller is installed, the calibrator has both calibration
gas MFCs on the same gas stream, installed in parallel (see Figure 2-25 and Figure 2-26).
The calibrator turns on the MFC with the lowest flow rate that can accommodate the
requested flow and can therefore supply the most accurate flow control. When a flow rate
is requested that is higher than the highest rated MFC (but lower than their combined
maximum flow rating), both controllers are activated.
EXAMPLE:
• Calibrator with one calibration gas MFC configured for 0-5 LPM:
Maximum gas flow = 5 LPM
Minimum gas flow = 500 cm3/min
• Calibrator with two calibration gas MFCs configured for 0-1 LPM and 0-
5 LPM:
Calibration gas flow rates:
5.001 to 6.000 LPM; both MFCs active
1.001 LPM – 5.000 LPM; High MFC active;
0.100 LPM – 1.000 LPM; Low MFC active

While the values for the MFC actual and target flows (i.e., Cal Flow Actual; Cal Flow
Targ) show the sum of all the active MFCs flows, the value for the MFC pressure applies
to only one MFC, not the sum as it is assumed that gas pressure is the same for all MFCs.
(Use the Setup>Dashboard menu to display the flows and pressure).

60 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 Instrument Chassis

DILUENT On Back Panel

INLET
PHOTOMETER
INLET
DILUENT brn
Valve
brn PHOTOMETER
brn Diluent ZERO IN
Purge Mass Flow Controller
Valve PHOTOMETER
DILUENT ZERO OUT

PRESSURE SENSOR
PRESSURE Cal Gas
CAL GAS 1 SENSOR Mass Flow Controller 1
INPUT GAS
INLET EXHAUST
PCA

CAL GAS 2 PHOTOMETER

INLET CAL GAS OUTLET
PRESSURE
SENSOR
yel CAL GAS
CAL GAS 3 yel OUTPUT 1
INLET orn blu
orn
CAL GAS
Cal Gas yel
OUTPUT 2
CAL GAS 4 Mass Flow Controller 2
INLET yel
yel
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD VENT
(on back panel)
blu
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

yel
yel

Figure 2-25. T700 Basic Calibrator with Multiple Calibration Gas MFCs

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 61

 Instrument Chassis

Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH

(1.0 LPM)
gry

O3 FLOW
Pressure

SENSOR
Regulator O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR
DILUENT grn

GENERATOR

O3 Generator Assembly
INLET PHOTOMETER
grn On Back Panel
PRESSURE SENSOR
DILUENT

O3
Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
brn PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA vio PHOTOMETER
INLET
Flow Control REF/MEAS vio
Valve
(800 cm 3)

Flow Control
Purge brn

(10 cm 3)
Valve
wht
brn
DILUENT PUMP wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE ZERO IN

INLET SENSOR
Diluent
INPUT GAS

Mass Flow Controller gry PHOTOMETER

O3 Gen ZERO OUT
PCA

CAL GAS 2 Valve

INLET
Cal Gas INTERNAL
CAL GAS VENT
Mass Flow Controller 1
PRESSURE red blk
CAL GAS 3 SENSOR
INLET blk
EXHAUST
orn blu

CAL GAS 4
orn GPT
INLET Valve
yel
yel PHOTOMETER
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel OUTLET
(on back panel)

CAL GAS
Cal Gas red OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 2
yel
CAL GAS
GPT blu
OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
yel GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD
yel

Figure 2-26. Pneumatics with All Options Installed (T700U, 3rd MFC; T700, O3 Generator, Photometer, and
GPT Chamber)

62 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 2.3.2.12. PNEUMATIC FLOW AND SETUP FOR PERMEATION TUBE GAS GENERATOR
The permeation tube gas generator (see Figure 2-27) is an alternative method for producing
known concentrations of stable gas such as SO2, NO2, etc. The generator consists of a
temperature regulated permeation tube oven, a flow restrictor, an optional output desorber,
and a user-supplied permeation tube. The optional desorber can improve the response time
of the calibrator especially when operating with NO2 tubes (when operating with sulfur
based gases it MUST be removed).
The permeation tube consists of a small container of a liquefied gas, with a small window
of PTFE through which the gas slowly permeates at a rate in the nanogram/min range. If
the tube is kept at constant temperature, usually about 50°C, the device will provide a stable
source of gas for a year or more. A pneumatic diagram of the calibrator with this option is
shown in Figure 2-28, including the generator.

Perm Tube
Oven

Optional
Desorber

Figure 2-27. Permeation Tube Gas Generator Option

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 63

 Instrument Chassis

PHOTOMETER BENCH
Pressure
Regulator
Flow Control
(1.0 LPM)
gry
grn

O3 FLOW
SENSOR
O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR

brn Flow PHOTOMETER

DILUENT

GENERATOR

O3 Generator Assembly
INLET grn Control PRESSURE SENSOR
(100 cm3)
DILUENT Diluent O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER On Back Panel

O3
Valve Mass Flow Controller Perm Tube PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA
Oven vio vio
REF/MEAS PHOTOMETER
(option) INLET
Valve
brn
Flow Control
Permeation (800 cm3)

Flow Control
Purge Tube

(100 cm3)
Valve
PUMP
DILUENT wht wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE ZERO IN

INLET SENSOR Perm
INPUT GAS

Valve PHOTOMETER
O3 Gen
PCA

ZERO OUT
Valve gry
CAL GAS 2
INLET
blk INTERNAL
CAL GAS VENT
PRESSURE GPT red
CAL GAS 3 SENSOR Valve blk
INLET EXHAUST

CAL GAS 4 orn

PHOTOMETER
INLET
yel yel
OUTLET
red
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel) CAL GAS
Cal Gas OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
GPT blu OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 2-28. Pneumatic Flow with Permeation Generator

64 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 Once installed and stabilized, generating a calibration gas from the calibrator with a
permeation generator is the same as if the gas were being produced using a gas cylinder as
the source, with the following exceptions and note:
• If you need a particular flow and don’t require a specific concentration,
then use MANUAL mode. When generating in MANUAL mode, the
output concentration is set by adjusting the DILUENT flow. The target
and actual concentrations are displayed as test values.
• If you need a particular concentration but don’t require a specific flow,
then use AUTO mode. When generating in AUTO mode, the output
concentration is set by entering the desired concentration. The TOTAL
flow entry has no effect; the calibrator’s output flow depends on the
target concentration.
• Please note that the name for the permeation tube gas MUST be
different from any gas supplied to the calibrator from a bottle. For
example, there could be an H2S permeation tube installed and a bottle of
H2S gas connected to the calibrator.

Important IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA

The generator is shipped WITHOUT a permeation tube installed.
The tube MUST be removed during shipping or anytime that
there is no diluent gas connected to the calibrator since there
must be a continuous purge flow across the tube.
Permeation tubes require 48 hours at 50°C to reach a stable
output. We recommend waiting this long before any calibration
checks, adjustments, or conclusions are reached about the
permeation tube.
Once the calibrator has stabilized, the response to the
permeation tube is not expected to change more than ± 5% if the
zero air is provided for Teledyne API’s M701 or other dry zero air
source.

Teledyne API recommends that replacement permeation tubes be purchased from:

VICI METRONICS
2991 Corvin Drive
Santa Clara, CA 95051 USA
Phone 408-737-0550 Fax 408-737-0346

PERMEATION TUBE SETUP FOR THE CALIBRATOR

1. Navigate to the Setup>Vars menu.

2. Set the Perm 1 Flow (this should be done with the flow standard connected at the
outlet of the perm tube oven).

3. Select a gas for the Perm1 Gas (the name of the gas produced by the permeation
tube generator MUST be different from the name of any bottled gas connected to
the calibrator).

4. Set the Perm 1 Rate for specific output (or elution rate).

65 Teledyne API Models T700 andT700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 PERMEATION TUBE CONCENTRATION CALCULATION
The permeation tube concentration is determined by the permeation tube’s specific output
or elution rate (which is normally stated in ng/min), the permeation tube temperature (°C)
and the air flow across it (slpm). The elution rate of the tube is normally stated at an
operating temperature of 50°C and is usually printed on the tube's shipping container. By
design, there is nominally 100 cm3/min of airflow across the tube and the tube is maintained
at 50°C. The output of the calibrator is the product of the elution rate with the total of the
100 cm3/min through the generator and the flow of diluent gas.
The temperature is set at 50.0°C. Check Setup>Vars and scroll to the IZS-TEMP variable
to verify that the temperature is properly set. It should be set to 50°C with over-and-under
temperature warnings set at 49°C and 51°C. There is a 105 cm3/min flow across the
permeation tube at all times to prevent build-up of the gas in the tubing.
This permeation tube source gas is diluted with zero air to generate desired concentration
of the specific gas. The calibrator’s output concentration (gas concentration) can be
calculated using the following equation:
P × Km
C=
F
Where:

P = permeation rate, ng/min @ 50°C.

24.46
Km = , where 24.46 is the molar volume in liters @ 25°C
MW
and MW is the molecular weight.
760mmHg . Km for SO2 = 0.382, NO2 = 0.532, H2S = 0.719, and NH3 =
1.436.

F = total flow rate (sum of 100 cm3/min and diluent flow), LPM.

C = concentration, ppm.

P 24.46
Thus, C= ×
F MW
Where, Temperature at 50°C = 323

Temperature at 25°C = 298

66 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 DUAL GAS OUTPUT (NOY – SPECIAL) SETUP AND PNEUMATIC FLOW
The standard output manifold has been removed and replaced with 2 output fittings, labeled
“Output A” and “Output B” (Figure 2-29). Output A is the primary calibration gas output,
all calibration functions can be performed on this output. Output B is a secondary output,
commonly used for NOy probe calibrations.

Note This output cannot be used for ozone generation using the
photometer feedback. It can be used for standard dilution
calibrations as well as GPT using ozone.

Figure 2-29. Rear Panel with Dual Output Option

When the dual gas output option is enabled, the output must be selected when generating
gas. In the Generate menu, select A or B in the Output field to select the output for
calibration.
Figure 2-30 depicts the pneumatic flow for the Calibrator with the optional dual gas output
at the output valve.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 67

 Figure 2-30. T700 Internal Pneumatics with Optional Dual Gas Output (NOy – Special)

Figure 2-31. T700U Pneumatic Diagram, with Dual Output and Three MFC Options

68 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

2.4. STARTUP AND FUNCTIONAL CHECKS
If you are unfamiliar with the calibrator principles of operation, we recommend that you
read Section 8.

2.4.1. INITIAL STARTUP

After making the electrical and pneumatic connections, turn on the instrument. The exhaust
fan (and pump if photometer option installed) should start immediately. A sequence of
status screens (Figure 2-32) appear prior to the Home page. The calibrator will be in
STANDBY mode and requires a minimum of 30 minutes for all of its internal components
to reach a stable operating temperature.

Figure 2-32. Status Screens at Startup

Figure 2-33. Typical Home Page Prior to Configuration

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 69

 2.4.2. ALERTS: WARNINGS AND OTHER MESSAGES
Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside the specified limits
during the warm-up period, the software will suppress most Alerts for 30 minutes after
power up. The Alerts page (Figure 2-34) shows the status of any active warning conditions
or user-configured Events. (For more detailed information about Alerts, see Section 2.5.3
provides, and for Events, see Section 2.6.2).
Alerts can be viewed and cleared via either the Alerts menu or the Alerts shortcut (Caution
symbol, bottom right corner of the screen). Although these alerts can be cleared from the
Active Alerts page, a history of all alerts remains in the Utilities>Alerts Log.

Figure 2-34. Viewing Active Alerts Page

2.4.3. FUNCTIONAL CHECKS AND VERIFICATION

During warm-up, verify that the software properly supports any hardware options that are
installed by navigating to the Setup>Instrument>Product Info page.
After warm-up, verify that the instrument is functioning within allowable operating
parameters:
• Check values for the operating parameters in the Dashboard page
against the instrument’s Final Calibrated Test and Validation Data sheet,
which lists these values as they appeared before the instrument left the
factory. (If any functional parameters are not displayed, configure the
Dashboard through the Setup>Dashboard menu to add them, Section
2.6.3).
• Verify MFC capacities through the Utilities>Diagnostics menu; select
each MFC and note the value in the Flow Range field.
• Generate calibration gases by using the Generate>Auto menu
(Section 3.2.1) and verify their values in the Dashboard.

70 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 Figure 2-35. Sample Dashboard Page

Figure 2-36. Dashboard Configurator

2.4.4. CALIBRATION GAS INLET PORTS SETUP

The calibrator generates calibration gases of various concentrations by precisely mixing
component gases of known concentrations with diluent (zero air). Instruments with the O3
generator and photometer can also use the gas phase titration method for generating very
precise concentrations of NO2.
As presented in Table 2-9, the calibrator is programmed with the most commonly used
gases and allows for four additional user-defined gases, USR1 thru USR4, which can be
used for either less common component gases or a different concentration of a gas already
selected.
Ensure the calibrator is in Standby Mode (set via the Home page Generate menu), and
navigate to the Setup>Gas>Cylinder menu to configure one to four cylinder ports for the
component gases being used. Refer to Figure 2-37 for the following instructions:
1. Select the Port to be configured.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 71

 2. If a single-gas cylinder is connected to the port being configured, press the first
configurable field under the Gas column and make a selection from the gas list (a
common gas or user-defined). If a multi-gas cylinder is connected to the port being
configured, repeat these steps for each gas.
3. Press the DONE button so that the gas name and the default fields for
Concentration and Units appear.
4. Press the Concentration field and use the pop-up numeric keypad to input the
concentration of the gas being programmed; then press the DONE button.
5. If the units of measure (Table 2-10) need to be changed, press the Units field and
make a selection from the pop-up list.
6. For a single-gas cylinder, leave the remaining Gas fields at “NONE” and press the
Apply button. For a multi-gas cylinder, program the next gas in the cylinder with its
concentration and units of measure.
For two different concentrations of the same gas, select USR1[2,3,4] for the gas name of
the second concentration.
If a port has no cylinder connected to it, leave all three of its settings at NONE.

Figure 2-37. Calibration Gas Inlet Ports Setup

Repeat the above steps for each of the Calibrator’s four gas inlet ports. If no gas is present
on a particular port, leave it set at the default setting of NONE.

72 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 Table 2-9. Calibrator Gas Types
NAME GAS TYPE
NONE Used for gas inlet ports where no gas bottle is attached
SO2 sulfur dioxide
H2S hydrogen sulfide
N2O nitrous oxide
NO nitric oxide
NO2 nitrogen dioxide
NH3 1 Ammonia 1
CO carbon monoxide, and;
CO2 carbon dioxide
HC General abbreviation for hydrocarbon
USR1 User-assigned 2
USR2 User-assigned 2
USR3 User-assigned 2
USR4 User-assigned 2
1
It is not recommended that ammonia be used in the calibrator.
2
For bottles of less common component gases not listed above, or for a different
concentration of another gas already selected

Table 2-10. Calibrator Units of Measure List

SYMBOL UNITS RESOLUTION
PPM parts per million 000.0
PPB parts per billion 000.0
MGM milligrams per cubic meter 000.0
UGM micrograms per cubic meter 000.0
PCT percent 0.000
PPT parts per thousand 00.00

2.4.5. SETTING THE CALIBRATOR’S TOTAL GAS FLOW RATE

The calibrator’s default total gas flow rate is 5 LPM. It uses this flow rate, along with the
concentrations programmed into the calibrator for the component gas cylinders during set
up, to compute individual flow rates for both diluent gas and calibration source gases in
order to produce calibration mixtures that match the desired output concentrations.
This Total Flow rate may be changed to fit the users’ application. Once the flow is changed,
then the new flow value becomes the total flow for all the gas concentration generated and
computes again the individual flow rates of the component gases and diluent accordingly.

Note The minimum total flow should equal 150% of the flow
requirements of all of the instruments to which the
calibrator will be supplying calibration gas.
Example: If the calibrator is expected to supply calibration
gas mixtures simultaneously to a system composed of
three analyzers, each requiring 2 LPM, the proper Total
Flow output should be set at:
(2 + 2 + 2) x 1.5 = 9.000 LPM

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 73

 Set the Total Flow by first ensuring that the calibrator is in Standby Mode (set in the Home
page Generate menu); then in the Setup>Vars menu edit the Total Flow Var.

Note Set the TOTAL FLOW rate between 10% and 100% (avoid
<10% or >100%) of the diluent MFC’s full scale rating.

The TOTAL FLOW is also affected by the following:

• The GENERATE > AUTO menu (see Section 3.2.1) or;
• As part of a GENERATE step when programming a sequence (see
Section 2.6.7).
The operator can individually set both the diluent flow rate and flow rates for the
component gas cylinders as part of the following:
• The GENERATE > MANUAL menu (see Section 3.2.2), or
• As part of a MANUAL step when programming a sequence (see
Section 2.6.7).

Note When calculating total required flow for calibrators with O3

photometers installed, ensure to account for the 800
cc/min flow it requires.

2.4.6. SELECTING A MODE FOR THE O3 GENERATOR OPTION

The O3 generator can be set to operate in either of two different modes: Constant or
Reference (Sections 2.4.6.1 and 2.4.6.2). However, when the photometer option is also
installed, the O3 generator can be set to operate in either Constant mode or Bench mode
(Sections 2.4.6.1 and 2.4.6.3).
Set the O3 Generator control mode by first ensuring that the calibrator is in Standby Mode
(set via the Home page Generate menu); then in the Setup>Vars menu edit O3 Gen Mode,
described in the next three subsections.

2.4.6.1. CNST (CONSTANT) MODE

In this mode, the O3 output of the generator is based on a single, constant, drive voltage,
and there is no Feedback loop control by the calibrator’s CPU.

2.4.6.2. REF (REFERENCE) MODE

The O3 control loop will use the generator reference detector's UV lamp measurement for
input. The CPU sets the UV lamp intensity to a level that corresponds to the O3
concentration set by the user.

2.4.6.3. BNCH (BENCH) MODE

The O3 concentration control loop will use the photometer’s O3 measurement as input. To
select a default O3 generator mode, press.

74 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

2.5. MENU OVERVIEW
Table 2-11 describes the main menus and provides cross-references to the respective
sections with configuration details.

Table 2-11. Menu Overview

MENU DESCRIPTION REFERENCE
View and plot concentration readings and other user-selected parameters Sections 2.5.1
Home
set up through the configuration shortcut or the Setup>Homescreen menu. and 2.6.5
View user-selected parameters (Setup>Dashboard) and their values, some Sections 2.5.2
Dashboard
of which can be displayed in a live-plot graph (Figure 2-38). and 2.6.3
View and clear active Alerts that were triggered by either factory-defined or Section 2.5.3
Alerts user-configured Events (see Setup>Events). Active and past Alerts are
recorded in the Utilities>Alerts Log).
Generate calibration gas mixtures based on the source gas(es) and Section 3.2
concentration(s) configured in the Setup>Gas>Cylinder menu. Section 2.4.4
Perform gas phase titration (GPT) calibrations. Section 3.2.4
Generate
Execute sequences configured in the Setup>Sequences menu. Section 2.6.7
Execute Levels configured in the Setup>Levels menu. Section 2.6.8
Place the calibrator in Standby mode. Section 3.1
View logs, download data and firmware updates, copy configurations
Utilities Section 2.5.5
between instruments, and run diagnostics.
Displays the data logs that were configured via the
Setup>Data Logging menu. From this list a log can be
Datalog View Section 2.5.5.1
selected and filters applied to view the desired data, which is
downloadable through the Utilities>USB Utilities page.
Displays a history of Alert messages triggered by factory-
Alerts Log defined and user-defined Events, such as warnings and Section 2.5.5.2
alarms (See Section 2.6.2 for Events configuration).
Serves multiple purposes using a flash drive connected to the
instrument’s front panel USB port:
• download data from instrument’s Data Acquisition System
USB Utilities (DAS), the Data Logger, to a flash drive (Section 2.5.5.3) Section 2.5.5.3
• update firmware (Section 6.2)
• transfer instrument configuration from/to other instruments
of the same model (Section 2.5.5.3)
• download a basic operation functionality report (Section

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 75

 MENU DESCRIPTION REFERENCE
Provides access to various pages that facilitate
Diagnostics (various)
troubleshooting.
This page shows voltage signals of several
analog input parameters, including those
Analog Inputs Section 7.1.3
from other instrumentation when the External
Analog Inputs Option is installed.
Shows voltage signals for one parameter
Analog Outputs (configured through Setup>Analog Outputs, Section 7.1.4
Section 2.6.9).
Shows whether specific available Signal In
Digital Inputs Section 7.1.3
features are active (ON) or inactive (OFF).
Activate (ON)/deactivate (OFF) user-
specified Signal Out features (configured in
Digital Outputs Section 7.1.3
the Setup>Digital Outputs menu,
Section 2.6.6.
(with Photometer option) Photo Flow Cal Calibrate the photometer flow. Section 5.2.5
Configure flow range, slope, offset, and
Diluent MFC
sensor offset for the diluent MFC, and finely Section 5.1
Cfg
adjust the drive and flow for each of 21 points.
Configure flow range, slope, offset, and
Cal1 MFC Cfg sensor offset for the Cal1 MFC, and finely Section 5.1
adjust the drive and flow for each of 21 points.
Auto Leak Run an automatic check for a measurable
Section 6.5.1
Check drop in pneumatic pressure.
Required any time there is a change made in
(with Photometer option) Back Pressure the pneumatic configuration (whether locally
Section 5.2.6
Compensation to the instrument or to the sampling system)
or after a gas pressure calibration.
(with Photometer option) Bench Cal Calibrate the ozone photometer (bench) Section 5.2.3
Pressure Cal Calibrate pressure sensors Section 5.4
Configure a variety of features and functions through these submenus for Section 2.6
Setup
customized operation.
Track and record concentration and calibration data and
selectable diagnostic parameters, the reports for which can
Datalogging be viewed in the Utilities>Datalog View menu and Section 2.6
downloaded to a flash drive via the Utilities>USB Utilities
menu (Section 2.6.1.3).
Select parameters and define the conditions by which they
Events are to be flagged and recorded in the Alerts log Section 2.6.2
(Utilities>Alerts Log) when they are triggered.
Dashboard Select parameters monitoring instrument functionality Section 2.6.3
(Figure 2-35, Figure 2-36).
Vars Manually adjust several software variables that define Section 2.6.4
specific operational parameters.
Homescreen Configure the three meters located along the bottom of the Section 2.6.5
display to show desired functions (Figure 2-57, Figure 2-38).
Map the rear-panel digital status outputs to a variety of
Digital Outputs signals present in the instrument to monitor operating Section 2.6.6
conditions or custom Events (Setup>Events).
Sequences Create automated sequential calibration steps. Section 2.6.7
Levels Create individual flow and concentration outputs for LEADS Section 2.6.8

76 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 MENU DESCRIPTION REFERENCE
Send user-selected parameter readings in the form of user-
Analog Outputs defined voltage or current loop signals as outputs to a strip Section 2.6.9
chart recorder and/or the data logger.
View product and system information, including list of
options, if any; view network settings; calibrate touchscreen;
Instrument view/adjust Date and Time settings; and check for firmware Section 2.6.10
updates when connected to a network that is connected to
the Internet.
COMM View and configure network and serial communications. Section 2.6.11
Configure the cylinder ports for the component gases being Section 2.4.4,
Gas
used. Figure 2-37

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 77

 2.5.1. HOME
Figure 2-38 shows the features of the main interface from the Home page. The meters at
the bottom of the display are user-selectable (see Section 2.6.5).

Figure 2-38. User Interface Orientation

Note The last page on display prior to drilling into a menu remains on
display until a choice in the menu is selected.

78 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 2.5.2. DASHBOARD
The dashboard displays an array of user-selected parameters and their values (Figure 2-39).
If there is a graphing icon in the upper right corner of a parameter, pressing that parameter
displays a live plot of its readings, as in Figure 2-40. Depending on the number of available
parameters selected, the Dashboard can have more than one page. See Section 2.6.3 for
configuration details.

Figure 2-39. Dashboard Page

Figure 2-40. Viewing a Live Plot from Dashboard Page

Three of the dashboard parameters can be set up for continuous display as meters located
below the concentration display of the Home page through the Setup>Homescreen menu
(Section 2.6.5).

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 79

 2.5.3. ALERTS
Alerts are notifications triggered by specific criteria having been met by either factory-
defined conditions (standard and not editable) or user-defined Events (Section 2.6.2). The
Active Alerts page shows the status of any active warning conditions or Events that have
been triggered.
When Alerts are triggered, a caution symbol appears in both the Alerts menu tab and in the
bottom right corner of the software interface, which serves as a shortcut to the Alerts page
from any other page. View a list of currently active Alerts by pressing either the Alerts
menu on the Home screen or by pressing the Alerts shortcut (Figure 2-41).
While Alerts can be cleared from the Active Alerts page, they remain recorded in the
Utilities>Alerts Log.

Figure 2-41. Navigating to the Active Alerts Page

Alerts appear as either latching or non-latching:

• Latching: displayed in Active Alerts screen when an Event is triggered and must
be cleared by the user.
• Non-latching: Active Alerts screen continuously updates based on the Event criteria,
clearing on its own.
To clear Alerts from the Active Alerts page, either check individual boxes to choose
specific Alerts, or check the Select All box to choose all Alerts, then press the Clear
Selected button.

80 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 When all Alerts are cleared, the Alerts menu tab no longer shows the caution symbol, and
a green LED replaces the caution symbol in the bottom right corner of the interface (Figure
2-42). However, Alerts can reappear if the conditions causing them are not resolved. For
troubleshooting guidance, refer to the instrument’s user manual.

Figure 2-42. Active Alerts Cleared

2.5.4. GENERATE
The Generate menu provides the ability to:
• Generate either ozone or zero air
• Execute a Sequence (configured in the Setup menu)
• Execute a Level (configured in the Setup menu)
• Place the instrument into Standby mode (suspend generating gas)
The Generate menu is presented in Section 3.2. To configure Sequences, see
Section 2.6.7or to configure Levels, see Section 2.6.8

Figure 2-43. Generate Page

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 81

 2.5.5. UTILITIES
The Utilities menu opens to the Datalog View, the Alerts Log, the USB Utilities, and the
Diagnostics submenus.

2.5.5.1. DATALOG VIEW

The Datalog View tab displays a list of data logs that were configured in the Setup>Data
Logging menu (Section 2.6.1). From this list a log can be selected and filters applied to
view the desired data.

2.5.5.2. ALERTS LOG

The Alerts Log holds a history of alerts that were triggered by factory-defined and user-
defined Events, such as warnings and alarms.

2.5.5.3. USB UTILITIES (DOWNLOADS AND UPDATES)

The USB Utility page serves multiple purposes using a flash drive connected to the
instrument’s front panel USB port:
• downloading Data Acquisition System (DAS) data from the instrument to a flash
drive (presented below).
• updating firmware (presented below and in Section 6.3).
• copying a configuration from one instrument to other same-model instruments
(presented below).
• downloading a basic operation functionality report (presented below and in
Section 6.2)

Figure 2-44. USB Utilities Pages

82 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 The Status field shows when an inserted flash drive has been detected, at which time firmware
updates, configuration copying and DAS downloading can be carried out.

DOWNLOADING DAS (DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM) DATA

DAS data (collected by the Datalogger, Section 2.6.1) can be downloaded from the
instrument to a flash drive through the Utilities>USB Utilities>DAS Download menu, as
follows:
1. Insert a flash drive into a front panel USB port and wait for the Status field to indicate
that the drive has been detected; available buttons will be enabled.

Figure 2-45. DAS Download Page

2. To copy the data to the flash drive, press the Start button next to “Download DAS Data
from Instrument.” (The Cancel button will be enabled).
3. When complete, as indicated in the Status field, the Cancel button becomes the Done
button: press Done and then remove the flash drive.

UPDATING FIRMWARE
It is possible to check for firmware updates, reload current firmware, and to update
firmware remotely. Because this is a maintenance item and there is more than one way to
implement an update, instructions are provided in Section 6.3.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 83

 TRANSFERRING CONFIGURATION TO OTHER INSTRUMENTS
Once an instrument is configured, the same configuration can be copied to other
instruments of the same Model. This encompasses essentially anything the user can
configure and does not apply to instrument-specific settings such as those that are
configured at the factory for calibration.

Figure 2-46. Configuration Transfer

1. In the source instrument, navigate to the Home>Utilities>USB

Utilities>General page.
2. Insert a flash drive into either of the two front panel USB ports.
3. When the Status field indicates that the USB drive has been detected, press
the “Download Configuration from Instrument” Start button.
4. When the Status field indicates that the download is complete, remove the
flash drive.
5. In the target instrument, navigate to the Home>Utilities>USB Utilities>General
page.
6. Insert a flash drive into either of the two front panel USB ports.
7. When the Status field indicates that the USB drive has been detected, press
the “Upload Configuration to Instrument” Start button.
When the Status field indicates that the upload is complete, remove the flash drive.

GENERATING A REPORT
The Report page is used typically for monitoring the functionality of the instrument. A new
report is generated every 24 hours and can be downloaded, and it can be uploaded to a
Cloud service for TAPI Technical Support. Because it is used in maintenance and
troubleshooting, the Report feature is presented in Section 6.2.

84 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 2.5.5.4. DIAGNOSTICS
The Diagnostics menu provides access to several diagnostics features, which can be helpful
in troubleshooting (Section 7). When an item in the menu is selected, the display shows its
description. Table 2-11 on page 75 also provides descriptions.

Note Some Diagnostics items do not appear in the menu unless the
instrument has been placed in Standby mode (Home>Generate
menu).

Figure 2-47. Sample Diagnostics Menu (differs by calibrator configuration)

2.5.6. SETUP
The Setup menu is used to configure the instrument’s software features, gather information
on the instrument’s performance, and configure and access data from the Datalogger, the
instrument’s internal data acquisition system (DAS). Section 2.6 provides details for the
menus under Setup.

2.6. SETUP MENU: FEATURES/FUNCTIONS CONFIGURATION

Use the Setup menu to configure the instrument’s software features, to gather information
on the instrument’s performance, and to configure and access data from the Datalogger,
the instrument’s internal data acquisition system (DAS). Once the setups are complete, the
saved configurations can be downloaded to a USB drive through the Utilities>USB Utilities
menu and uploaded to other instruments of the same model (Section 2.7).

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 85

 2.6.1. SETUP>DATA LOGGING (DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM, DAS)
The Data Logger captures and stores user-defined data. In the Setup>Data Logging menu
press the ADD button to create a new log, or select an existing log from the Data Logging
list and press the EDIT or DELETE button to make the desired changes. Follow instruction
shown in Figure 2-48.

Figure 2-48. Data Log Configuration

86 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 2.6.1.1. CONFIGURING TRIGGER TYPES: PERIODIC
The Periodic trigger is a timer-based trigger that is used to log data at a specific time
interval. Periodic Trigger requires an interval that is set to number of minutes and a start
time that is set to date and clock time.

Figure 2-49. Datalog Periodic Trigger Configuration

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 87

 2.6.1.2. CONFIGURING TRIGGER TYPES: CONDITIONAL
Conditional Trigger tracks/records data for user-selected parameters that meet specified
conditions.

Figure 2-50. Datalog - Conditional Trigger Configuration

2.6.1.3. DOWNLOADING DAS (DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM) DATA

In the Utilities>USB Utilities menu, instrument data can be downloaded to a flash drive,
as presented here.

Figure 2-51. USB Utility Page

8. Press USB Utilities menu to open the utility page (Figure 2-51).
9. Insert a flash drive into a front panel USB port and wait for the Status field to
indicate that the drive has been detected and available buttons are enabled
(Figure 2-52).

88 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 Figure 2-52. DAS Data Download

10. To copy the data to the flash drive, press the Start button next to “Download
DAS Data from Instrument.” (The Cancel button will be enabled).
11. Wait for the Status field to indicate that the transfer is complete and the Cancel
button becomes the Done button.
12. Press the Done button; then remove the flash drive.
(The Update Firmware field is for checking for and installing firmware updates when the
instrument is connected to the Internet, and is presented in Section 6.2. The
Upload/Download Configuration field is for transferring instrument configuration from/to
other instruments, and is presented in Section 2.7).

2.6.2. SETUP>EVENTS
Events are occurrences that relate to any operating function, and will trigger Alerts
(Section 2.5.3). Events can provide diagnostic information about the instrument, typically
referred to as “Warnings”, or they can provide additional instrument functionality, such as
concentration alarms. The instrument comes from the factory with a number of pre-defined
warning Events, while the Setup>Events Configuration page provides the capability to
create additional, user-defined Events. Events are listed in the Events page (Figure 2-53)
under the Setup menu.

Figure 2-53. Events List

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 89

 Access the Events Configuration page either from the Active Alerts page (Alerts Menu) by
pressing the configuration button, or through the Home>Setup>Events menu (Figure 2-53).
Press ADD to create a new Event (refer to Figure 2-54 for details), or select an existing
Event to either Edit or Delete it.

Figure 2-54. Event Configuration

• allows the choice of whether to track and record the Event

(uncheck this box to “turn off” or deactivate the Event without deleting it). An
Event must be enabled in order to use the Visible and the Latching options.

• allows the choice of whether or not to display the Event in the

Alerts page when it is triggered (it will still be recorded and can be viewed in
the Utilities>Alerts Log).To use this option, the Event must be enabled.

• allows the choice of whether or not to keep an Event visible

even if the conditions that triggered it were to correct themselves. (Latching
requires that the user interact with the Active Alerts screen to manually clear
the Alert and internal Event state. Non-latching allows the entry in the Active
Alerts screen and the internal Event state to continuously update based on
the Event criteria, requiring no user interaction to clear the Alert or Event
state).

90 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 2.6.3. SETUP>DASHBOARD
Configure the Dashboard to show the functions and conditions desired for viewing. Select
an available tag in the left column and press the right arrow to populate the Dashboard.

Figure 2-55. Dashboard Configuration

2.6.4. SETUP>VARS: INTERNAL VARIABLES

The calibrator has several user-adjustable software variables, which define certain
operational parameters. Usually, these variables are automatically set by the instrument’s
firmware, but can be manually redefined using the Setup>Vars menu. Select a Var to see
its description to the right in the VARS Configurator. Press the Edit button to change the
attributes of the selected Var.

Figure 2-56. Vars Configuration

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 91

 2.6.5. SETUP>HOMESCREEN
Configure the Homescreen to display three of the available tags and their values in the
meters located along the bottom of Home page. Refer to Figure 2-38 for an orientation to
Home page and Figure 2-57 for Homescreen configuration page.

Figure 2-57. Homescreen Configuration

2.6.6. SETUP>DIGITAL (STATUS) OUTPUTS

Specify the function of each digital output (connected through the rear panel STATUS
connector) by mapping the output to a selection of “Signals” present in the instrument.
Create custom “Signals” in the Setup>Events menu (Section 2.6.2). (If the Motherboard
Relay Option was installed, the four additional relays can also be mapped).
To map Digital Outputs to Signals:
1. In the Outputs list select a pin to be configured.
2. In the Signals list select a parameter to assign to the selected pin.
3. Press the Map button.
4. If/as needed, toggle the polarity by pressing the Polarity button.
5. To save, press the Apply button, or to discard, press the Home or the back
icon (a pop-up provides a warning that the changes will be lost, and will prompt
for confirmation to apply changes or not). Another option is to reassign the pin
to the “Not Mapped” parameter.
These status outputs are visible in the Utilities>Diagnostics>Digital Outputs menu, and are
labeled “Digital Output [#]” followed by the signal name. They can be selected and their
state changed between ON and OFF. (Note that the Digital Outputs list in the
Utilities>Diagnostics menu also includes the Control Outputs and other functions).

Figure 2-58. Digital Outputs Setup

92 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 2.6.7. SETUP>SEQUENCES: AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION OPERATIONS
(This menu appears only when the Mode is set to STANDBY (from the Generate menu)).
The calibrator can be set up to perform automatic calibration sequences of multiple steps.
These sequences can perform all of the calibration mixture operations available for manual
operation and can be initiated by one of the following methods:
• front panel touch screen buttons
• internal timer
• external digital control inputs
• RS-232 interface
• Ethernet interface
• sub-processes in another sequence
Multiple sequences can be programmed and enabled or disabled. Configurable sequence
attributes are listed and described in Table 2-12. Figure 2-59 illustrates sequence setup.

Note Last in = first out: the last step input into the program during
configuration under “Edit Steps” is the first step executed, which
means that multiple steps must be input in their reverse order;
advanced planning is recommended.

Table 2-12. Calibration Sequences Configuration Attributes

ATTRIBUTE NAME DESCRIPTION
Name Allows the user to input a unique label identifying the sequence.
Controls the date and time to start the sequence (Timer Start) and the amount of time
to wait before repeating the sequence (Timer Delta) if the Repeat Count attribute is
Timer set.

Repeat Count Number of times to execute the same sequence.

Input CC Specifies which of the calibrator’s Digital Control Inputs will initiate the sequence.
Specifies which of the calibrator’s Digital Control Outputs will be set when the
Output CC
sequence is active.
Checked Enable box enables the attribute to initiate the sequence as configured.
Enable Unchecked Enable box disables the attribute’s initiation of the sequence.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 93

 ATTRIBUTE NAME DESCRIPTION
Selections for programming the activities and instructions that make up the
Step Types
calibration sequence.
Puts the instrument into generate mode, similar in operation
MANUAL and effect to the Generate>Generate>MANUAL function
used at the front panel.
Puts the instrument into GENERATE mode. Similar in
operation and effect to the
GENERATE
Generate>Generate>AUTO function used at the front
panel.
Initiates a Gas Phase Titration operation (recommended to
GPT
be preceded first by a GPTZ and then a GPTPS).
GPTZ Initiates a Gas Phase Titration Zero operation
GPTPS Initiates a Gas Phase Titration Preset procedure.
PURGE Puts the calibrator into PURGE mode.
STANDBY Puts the calibrator in Standby mode for the duration
Calls another sequence to be executed at this time. The
calling sequence will resume running when the called
EXECSEQ
sequence is completed. Up to 5 levels of nested sequences
can be programmed.
Causes the sequence to activate the calibrator’s digital
control outputs. Similar to the CC OUTPUT attribute, but
can be set and reset by individual steps. It is very useful in
SET CC OUTPUT situations where the control outputs are being used to
trigger other devices that need to be turned off and on in
sync with the operation of the calibrator as it progresses
through the sequence.
Allows the sequence to execute a LEADS function created
LEVEL
in the Setup>Levels menu.
Allows activation of Status Block 1 for rear panel physical
SET STATUS BLOCK Control Outputs and/or Status Block 2 for communicating
status.

Note It is generally a good idea to end each calibration

sequence with a PURGE instruction followed by an
instruction to return the instrument to STANDBY mode.
Even if a PURGE is not included, the last instruction in a
sequence should always be to place the calibrator in
STANDBY mode.

Figure 2-59 shows the main screens in Sequence configuration.

94 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 Figure 2-59. Sequence Configuration

Note When the start time is set for a date/time that has passed,
the sequence will properly calculate the next run time
based on that past date/time.

2.6.7.1. SETTING UP CONTROL INPUTS FOR A SEQUENCE

The calibrator’s control inputs allow the entire sequence to be triggered from an external
source. This feature allows the calibrator to operate in a slave mode so that external control
sources, such as a data logger can initiate the calibration sequences.
The calibrator’s control inputs connector is located on the rear panel (Figure 2-2).
• 12 separate ON/OFF switches assigned to separate calibration
sequences or;
• A 12-bit wide bus allowing the user to define activation codes for up to
4095 separate calibration sequences.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 95

 To assign a CC INPUT pattern/code to a particular sequence in the Setup>Sequences
menu:
1. Select the desired Sequence (or create a new Sequence).
2. In the Input CC field check the Enable box.
3. Press the Edit button.
4. Check the desired control input pin(s).
5. Press Done.

Figure 2-60. Sequence CC Inputs Setup Page

2.6.7.2. SETTING UP CONTROL OUTPUTS FOR A SEQUENCE

The calibrator’s control outputs allow the calibrator to control devices that accept logic-
level digital inputs, such as programmable logic controllers (PLCs), data loggers, or digital
relays/valve drivers.
They can be used as:
• 12 separate ON/OFF switches assigned to separate calibration
sequences, or
• a 12-bit wide bus allowing the user to define activation codes for up to
4095 separate calibration sequences.
They can be set so that they are:
• active whenever a particular calibration sequence is operating, or
• activated or deactivated as individual steps within a calibration sequence
(see Section 2.6.7.4).

96 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 To assign a CC OUTPUT pattern/code to a particular sequence in the Setup>Sequences
menu:
1. Select the desired Sequence (or create a new Sequence).
2. In the Output CC field check the Enable box.
3. Press the Edit button to open the Sequence CC Outputs page.
4. Check the desired control output pin(s).
5. Press Done.

Figure 2-61. Sequence CC Outputs Setup Page

2.6.7.3. PARAMETERS FOR THE STEP TYPES

Several parameters are configurable within a Step Type (Table 2-12 contains step type
descriptions), such as gas, concentration, units of measure, and/or flow. Each Step Type
has its own parameters, and all allow setting a Duration in minutes, except EXECSEQ,
which is for nesting previously configured sequences. Duration causes the calibrator to
continue performing the Step Type for the number of minutes input.

2.6.7.4. DELETING OR EDITING SEQUENCES OR INDIVIDUAL STEPS IN A SEQUENCE

In the Setup>Sequences menu, select the Sequence to be changed, and press the button for
the intended action:
Edit: Edit the Sequence name, timer, repeat count, input and output CCs.
Edit Steps: Add a new step within the sequence (New).
Select a specific step within the sequence to change (Edit or Delete).
Delete: Delete the entire sequence with all of its steps.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 97

 2.6.8. SETUP > LEVELS: SETTING UP AND USING LEADS (DASIBI) OPERATING
LEVELS
(This menu appears only when the Mode is set to STANDBY (from the Generate menu)).

2.6.8.1. GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT LEADS LEVELS

The calibrator can be equipped with a version of firmware that includes support for
LEADS, a data collection and analysis system LEADS specifically designed for handling
meteorological and environmental data particularly when there is a need to integrate data
and control instrumentation from several different manufacturers. When a calibrator is
equipped with the optional LEADS software used in conjunction with data loggers located
in the central data analysis facility, it is possible to collect and buffer data between the
various calibrators, analyzers and metrological equipment remotely located at an air
monitoring station.
Because LEADS was originally developed for use with TNRCC using Dasibi 5008
calibrators, the LEADS version of the calibrator includes support for Dasibi “Dot” serial
data commands and operational “Levels”.
It also includes a method for driving external devices via contact closure control outputs in
conjunction with an optional bolt-on valve driver assembly (see Section 2.3.1.6).

Note For more information on the LEADS system, please visit

http://www.meteostar.com/.

2.6.8.2. DOT COMMANDS

The Dasibi “Dot” commands form a text-based (ASCII) data protocol that is transmitted
between a control computer (XENO data logger in this case) and a calibrator or ambient
gas analyzer over an RS-232 connection. The details of the protocol are beyond the scope
of this document, but in its simplest form the protocol is based on a two or three digit
integer preceded by a control-A and a period (.) and then followed by a “!” and a two digit
checksum.
EXAMPLE: ^A.xxx!nn
For further information on Dot commands, please contact Teledyne API’S Technical
Support team.
A calibrator equipped with LEADS software can be simultaneously operated over the same
COMM port using standard Teledyne API’s serial data commands and is compatible with
APICOM versions 5 and later which include an added feature that allows a user to edit,
upload and download Level tables.

98 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

 2.6.8.3. PROGRAMMING, EDITING, AND ACTIVATING LEVELS
Up to twenty Levels can be programmed and used with the calibrator, using a range of ID
numbers from 0-98. Level 99 is reserved for standby. The Levels are not time based and
do not include characteristics such as start time or duration; therefore, a single LEVEL
cannot switch between different concentration levels and flow rates. Separate flow and
concentration outputs must be programmed into separate LEVELs which are then
individually started and stopped either by an operator at the calibrator’s front panel or
through a serial data operation over the RS-232 or Ethernet ports.

2.6.8.4. PROGRAMMING LEVELS

To program a new Level, refer to Figure 2-62 for the following steps:
1. Navigate to the Setup>Levels menu.
2. Use the New button to start a new Level (Default first new Level ID is 0; default
Action is Generate)
3. Use the Edit button to start programming the new Level.
4. Use the Level field to assign a different ID (numeric keypad pops up)
5. Use the Action field to assign the type of step to execute
6. As applicable, assign a target concentration, gas type, and/or flow rate(s).
If the applicable is installed, assign a Mode for O3 Gen depending on the option:
For the O3 Generator option, choose OFF, Constant, or Reference
For the Photometer option or the O3 Generator and Photometer options together,
choose OFF, Constant, or Bench
7. Configure one or both of two Status output blocks:
• Status Block1: This block corresponds to the physical CONTROL
OUTPUT connections located on the back panel of the calibrator (see
Figure 2-2 and Section 2.3.1.5).
• Status Block2: The second status block does not correspond to any
physical output but is used to communicate status over the serial data
port.
8. Press the Done button to complete the programming for the individual Level.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 99

 Figure 2-62. Levels Programming and Editing

2.6.8.5. EDITING/DELETING LEVELS

To edit an existing Level, navigate to the Setup>Levels menu, select a Level and start with
Step 3 above.
To delete an existing Level, navigate to the Setup>Levels menu, select a Level and use the
Delete button.

2.6.8.6. ACTIVATING LEVELS

To activate an existing Level, from Home page navigate to the Generate menu, press the
LEVEL button, then select the Level by its ID, and press the Generate button.

2.6.9. SETUP > ANALOG OUTPUT

The calibrator comes equipped with one configurable analog output. It can be set by the
user to carry the current signal level of any one of several functions in the calibrator. The
Analog Out connector will output an analog VDC signal that rises and falls in relationship
with the value of the selected function.
1. In the Setup>Analog Outputs>Analog Output Cfg menu press the button in the
Signal Out field and select a function from the pop-up list. (Selecting “Not
Mapped” disables all other fields in the Analog Output Configurator).

100 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 2. In the Min Max fields input the minimum and maximum values for the slected
function’s range.
3. In the Calibration Type field, select either AUTO or MANUAL.
• AUTO sets the software to automatically calibrate not only the user-
selected Signal Out function, but also the available MFCs.
• MANUAL allows fine and coarse adjustments when calibrating the user-
selected Signal Out function.
4. In the Range field* select the desired full-scale value of the signal output (see
Section 2.6.9.1).
5. In the Recorder Offset field* input a bipolar voltage offset if needed to
compensate for noise (see Section 2.6.9.2). This field is not available when
Range is set to Current loop.
6. For the Allow Overrange box, either check to allow ± 5% overrange, or leave
blank if your recording device is sensitive to excess voltage or current.
7. Press the Apply button.
8. Go to the Analog Output Cal menu to calibrate the new settings (see
Section 2.6.9.3).

* Changes to Range or Recorder Offset require that this output be recalibrated.

Figure 2-63. Analog Output Configuration

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 101
 2.6.9.1. ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE RANGE CONFIGURATION
In its standard configuration, the analog outputs is set to output a 0 – 5 VDC signals. Several
other output ranges are available (see Table 2-13). Each range is usable from -5% to + 5%
of the rated span.

Table 2-13. Analog Output Voltage Range Min/Max

RANGE SPAN MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT
0-100 mVDC -5 mVDC 105 mVDC
0-1 VDC -0.05 VDC 1.05 VDC
0-5 VDC -0.25 VDC 5.25 VDC
0-10 VDC -0.5 VDC 10.5 VDC
The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC.

2.6.9.2. ADDING A RECORDER OFFSET

Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal be significantly different from the
baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise around the
zero point. This can be achieved in the calibrator by defining a zero offset, a small voltage
(e.g., 10% of span).

2.6.9.3. ANALOG OUTPUT CHANNEL CALIBRATION

Analog Output calibration needs to be carried out on first startup of the calibrator
(performed in the factory as part of the configuration process) or whenever recalibration is
required. The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically or adjusted manually.
In its default mode, the instrument is configured for automatic calibration of all channels,
which is useful for clearing any analog calibration warnings associated with channels that
will not be used or connected to any input or recording device, e.g., data logger.

Note Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in

cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the
characteristics of the recording device.

MANUAL CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS CONFIGURED FOR VOLTAGE RANGES

For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be calibrated manually.
Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals and by
changing the actual output signal level in 100, 10 or 1-count increments in the Analog
Output Cal page with the Calibration Type set to Manual.

102 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 V OUT + V IN +

V OUT - V IN -
Recording
ANALYZER
Device

Figure 2-64. Setup for Calibrating the Analog Output Signals

Table 2-14. Voltage Tolerances for the Analog Output Calibration

MINIMUM
FULL ZERO SPAN SPAN
ADJUSTMENT
SCALE TOLERANCE VOLTAGE TOLERANCE
(1 COUNT)
0.1 VDC ±0.0005V 90 mV ±0.001V 0.02 mV
1 VDC ±0.001V 900 mV ±0.001V 0.24 mV
5 VDC ±0.002V 4500 mV ±0.003V 1.22 mV
10 VDC ±0.004V 4500 mV ±0.006V 2.44 mV

Adjust the signal levels of the analog output in the Setup>Analog Outputs>Analog Output
Cal menu.

2.6.10. SETUP > INSTRUMENT

This submenu displays product, system, and software information for the instrument
(useful for identifying the software and hardware when contacting Technical Support), and
allows time zone and language selection. It is also an alternate place to check for and install
software updates.
Special instrument or software features or installed options may also be listed here.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 103
 2.6.11. SETUP > COMM: COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
This menu is for specifying the various communications configurations.

2.6.11.1. COM1/COM2
Configure the instrument’s COM1 or COM2 ports to operate in modes listed in Table 2-15.
Table 2-15. COM1/COM2 Configuration

MODE DESCRIPTION
Baud Rate Set the baud rate for the COM1 or COM2 port being configured.
Command Prompt
Enable/disable a command prompt to be displayed when in terminal mode.
Display
Data Bits Set the data bits to 7 or 8 (typically set in conjunction with Parity and Stop bits).
Echo and Line
Enable/disable character echoing and line editing.
Editing
Choose SOFTWARE handshaking for data flow control (do NOT use
SOFTWARE handshaking mode when using MODBUS RTU for Protocol mode;
select only HARDWARE or OFF for MODBUS RTU),
Handshaking Mode or HARDWARE for CTS/RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking. (This
style of data transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or
terminal emulation protocols).
Or choose to turn OFF handshaking.
Hardware Error
Enable/disable hardware error checking.
Checking
Enable/disable the hardware First In – First Out (FIFO) for improving data transfer
Hardware FIFO
rate for that COM port.
Modem Connection Select either a modem connection or a direct cable connection.
Modem Init String Input an initialization string to enable the modem to communicate.
Enable/disable multidrop mode for multi-instrument configuration on a single
Multidrop communications channel. Multidrop requires a unique ID for each instrument in
the chain (Setup>Vars>Instrument ID).
Select odd, or even, or no parity (typically set in conjunction with Data Bits and
Parity
Stop Bits).
Select among the communications protocols: TAPI, MODBUS RTU, or MODBUS
Protocol
ASCII (MODBUS: Section 4.4)
Enable/disable Quiet mode, which suppresses any feedback from the analyzer
(such as warning messages) to the remote device and is typically used when the
Quiet Mode port is communicating with a computer program where such intermittent
messages might cause communication problems.
Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them.
Enable/disable the rear panel COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485
RS-485 mode has precedence over Multidrop mode if both are enabled. Also, RS-485
configuration disables the rear panel USB port.
Enable/disable the requirement for a password for this serial port to respond. The
Security
only command that is active is the request-for-help command (? CR).
Stop bits Select either 0 or 1 stop bit (typically set in conjunction with Parity and Data bits).

104 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 2.6.11.2. TCP PORT1
TCP Port1 allows choosing whether or not to display the command prompt, editing the Port
1 number for defining the terminal control port by which terminal emulation software
addresses the instrument, such as Internet or NumaView™ Remote software, and enabling
or disabling security on this port.

2.6.11.3. TCP PORT2

TCP Port2 is configured with the port number for MODBUS.

2.6.11.4. NETWORK SETTINGS

The Setup>Comm>Network Settings menu is for Ethernet configuration. The address
settings default to automatic configuration by Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP). Most users will want to configure the instrument with a static IP address: click
the Static radio button to manually assign a static IP address (consult your network
administrator, and see Table 2-16 for information).

Figure 2-65. Communications Configuration, Network Settings

Table 2-16. LAN/Ethernet Configuration Properties

A string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g. 192.168.76.55.) is the

IP address
internet protocol address of the instrument itself.
A string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g. 255.255.252.0) number
that masks an IP address, and divides the IP address into network address and
host address and identifies the LAN to which the device is connected. All
Subnet Mask addressable devices and computers on a LAN must have the same subnet
mask. Any transmissions sent to devices with different subnets are assumed to
be outside of the LAN and are routed through the gateway computer onto the
Internet.
A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument IP address (e.g.
Default
192.168.76.1.) that is the address of the computer used by your LAN and serves
Gateway
as a router to access the Internet or another network.

2.6.12. SETUP>GAS
Gas configuration was detailed during the Startup procedures in Section 2.4.4.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 105
2.7. TRANSFERRING CONFIGURATION TO OTHER INSTRUMENTS
Once an instrument is configured, the same configuration can be copied to other
instruments of the same Model.

Figure 2-66. Configuration Transfer

1. In the source instrument, go to the Home>Utilities>USB Utilities page.

2. Insert a flash drive into either of the two front panel USB ports.
3. When the Status field indicates that the USB drive has been detected, press
the “Download Configuration from Instrument” Start button.
4. When the Status field indicates that the download is complete, remove the
flash drive.
5. In the target instrument, go to the Home>Utilities>USB Utilities page.
6. Insert a flash drive into either of the two front panel USB ports.
7. When the Status field indicates that the USB drive has been detected, press
the “Upload Configuration to Instrument” Start button.
8. When the Status field indicates that the upload is complete, remove the flash
drive.

106 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
3. OPERATING MODES, BASIC OPERATION, AND CONFIGURATIONS
This Section starts with a description of the basic modes of operation in order to begin
operation right away, and then provides configuration instructions for other functions.
Standby is the most common of the calibrator’s software operating modes (Section 3.1);
use this mode to configure the calibrator and perform other procedures. Generate is another
common mode (Section 3.2); use this mode produce calculated calibration gas mixtures.
Note that the ozone generator in the T700U can operate in a high range or a low range.
High range is similar to the standard T700 with an ozone generator option. Low range is
more like a fractional mode in that it is used for producing low levels of ozone during a
GPT calibration. The T700U low range operation is automatically invoked based on the O3
concentration and total flow specified, i.e., when O3 output is < 500 PPB*LPM.
Table 3-1 presents descriptions of the modes. Sections 3.1 through 3.2.9 provide details.

Table 3-1. Calibrator Operating Modes

MODE DESCRIPTION
STANDBY The calibrator and all of its subsystems are inactive. Always ensure that the calibrator is in this mode
when performing configurations (Section 3.1). The Standby button is in the Generate page.
GENERATE In this mode, the instrument is engaged in producing calibration gas mixtures (Section 3.2).
AUTO The calibrator performs basic generation of calibration mixtures (Section 3.2.1).
Supports low range in T700U when generating ozone.
MANUAL The calibrator produces calibration gas mixtures (Section 3.2.2).
PURGE The calibrator uses diluent (zero air) to purge its internal pneumatics of all source gas
and previously created calibration mixtures (Section 3.2.3).
GPT1 Gas Phase Titration method where the calibrator uses the O3 generator and source
gas inputs to mix and generate calibration gas (Section 3.2.4). Supports low range in
T700U.
GPTZ1 Gas Phase Titration Zero where the calibrator obtains the baseline NO and NOx
readings for calculating the NOx converter efficiency (CE) (Section 3.2.5). Supports
low range in T700U.
GPTPS2 Gas Phase Titration Preset where the calibrator determines the precise performance
characteristics of the O3 generator at the target values for an upcoming GPT
calibration (Section 3.2.6). Supports low range in T700U.
SEQUENCE The calibrator executes Sequences (Section 3.2.7) that were configured in the
Setup>Sequences menu (Section 2.6.7).
LEVEL The calibrator executes Levels (Section 3.2.9), which are operational functions for
LEADS (Section 2.6.8.1) that were configured in the Setup>Levels menu
(Section 2.6.8.3).
1 This mode is not available in units without an O3 generator option installed.
2 This mode is not available in units without a photometer option installed.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 107
3.1. STANDBY MODE
When the calibrator is in Standby mode (Generate>Standby), it and all of its subsystems
(including the O3 generator and photometer options, if installed) are inactive, although
Dashboard functions and Alerts continuously update as displayed in the front panel. All
internal valves are closed except the diluent inlet valve. The mass flow controllers are also
turned off.
• Some functions are not available unless the instrument is in Standby
mode, e.g., Setup>Gas or Utilities>Diagnostics>Pressure Cal.
• Some functions that conflict with the accurate creation of calibration gas
mixtures automatically place the calibrator into Standby mode when
activated.
• The MFC pressures are not monitored in Standby mode since the MFCs
are turned OFF in this mode. This prevents erroneous Alerts from
appearing.

Note The calibrator should always be placed in STANDBY mode

(Home>Generate>Standby button) when not needed to
produce calibration gas. The last step of any calibration
sequences should always be the STANDBY instruction.

Table 3-2 shows the status of the calibrator’s various pneumatic components when the
calibrator is in Standby mode.

Table 3-2. Status of Internal Pneumatics during STANDBY Mode

VALVES PHOT
MODE MFCS
(X = CLOSED; O = OPEN; D = DEENERGIZED; E = ENERGIZED) PUMP
CYL CYL CYL CYL O3 PHOT
PURGE DILUENT GPT CAL1 CAL21 DILUENT
1 2 3 4 GEN M/R1

Standby X X X X X O D D
Reference
Phase
OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.

In instruments with optional O3 generators installed, airflow is maintained during Standby

mode so that the generator can continue to operate at its most efficient temperature.

108 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Instrument Chassis

Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH

(1.0 LPM)
gry

O3 FLOW
SENSOR
Pressure
Regulator O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR
DILUENT

O3 Generator Assembly
GENERATOR
INLET grn PHOTOMETER
grn
PRESSURE SENSOR On Back Panel
DILUENT

O3
Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA vio PHOTOMETER
INLET
brn
Flow Control REF/MEAS vio
OFF (800 cm3)
Valve

Flow Control
Purge brn brn

(100 cm3)
Valve
wht
PUMP
DILUENT Diluent OFF wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE ZERO IN

Mass Flow Controller
INLET SENSOR
INPUT GAS

O3 Gen PHOTOMETER
PCA

Valve ZERO OUT

CAL GAS 2 gry
INLET
CAL GAS blk INTERNAL
PRESSURE red VENT
CAL GAS 3 SENSOR
blk
INLET EXHAUST
GPT
orn
Valve
CAL GAS 4
INLET
orn
OFF PHOTOMETER
yel OUTLET
yel red
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel) yel CAL GAS
Cal Gas OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
GPT blu
OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 3-1. Gas Flow with O3 Generator and Photometer Options during Standby Mode

3.2. GENERATE MODE

In Generate Mode the calibrator generates the user’s desired calibration gas mixtures based
on the source gas(es) and concentration(s) entered during initial cylinder port configuration
through the Setup>Gas>Cylinder menu (see Section 2.4.4). If the unit has an optional O3
generator installed, various concentrations of O3 can be set up and generated as well.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 109
 Instrument Chassis

DILUENT On Back Panel

INLET
PHOTOMETER
INLET
DILUENT
Valve brn
PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN

brn
Purge
Valve PHOTOMETER
brn ZERO OUT
DILUENT
CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE SENSOR PRESSURE
INLET SENSOR EXHAUST
INPUT GAS

Diluent
Mass Flow Controller
PCA

CAL GAS 2 PHOTOMETER

INLET OUTLET
CAL GAS
PRESSURE
SENSOR CAL GAS
CAL GAS 3 OUTPUT 1
INLET
orn
CAL GAS
CAL GAS 4
orn OUTPUT 2
yel
INLET
yel blu
VENT
yel blu
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel) Cal Gas GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD
Mass Flow Controller

Figure 3-2. Gas Flow through Basic Calibrator in Generate Mode

Table 3-3 shows the status of the calibrator’s various pneumatic components when the
calibrator is in Generate mode:

Table 3-3. Status of Internal Pneumatics During Generate Mode

VALVES
MFCs
(X = CLOSED; O = OPEN; D = DEENERGIZED; E = ENERGIZED) PHOT
GAS TYPE PUMP
CYL CYL CYL O3
CYL2 PURGE DILUENT GPT PHOT M/R CAL1 CAL21 DILUENT
1 3 4 GEN

Generate Reference
O2 O2 O2 O2 X O D D ON3 ON3 ON OFF
Source Gas Phase

Generate O3 X X X X X O D E Switching OFF OFF OFF ON

1
Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.
2
The valve associated with the cylinder containing the chosen source gas is open.
3
In instrument with multiple MFCs the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested.

110 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Instrument Chassis

Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH

(1.0 LPM)
gry

O3 FLOW
Pressure

SENSOR
Regulator O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR
DILUENT

GENERATOR

O3 Generator Assembly
INLET grn PHOTOMETER
grn
PRESSURE SENSOR On Back Panel
DILUENT

O3
Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER vio PHOTOMETER
brn PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA INLET

REF/MEAS
vio
Flow Control Valve
(800 cm3)

Flow Control
Purge brn brn

(100 cm3)
Valve wht
DILUENT Diluent OFF wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE Mass Flow Controller ZERO IN

INLET SENSOR
INPUT GAS

O3 Gen
PCA

PHOTOMETER
CAL GAS 2 Valve
CAL GAS ZERO OUT
INLET gry
PRESSURE
SENSOR INTERNAL
red blk VENT
CAL GAS 3 blk
INLET EXHAUST
orn GPT
Valve
CAL GAS 4
orn
PHOTOMETER
INLET OUTLET
yel
yel red
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel) yel CAL GAS
Cal Gas OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
GPT blu
OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 3-3. T700U Gas Flow and T700 with O3 Options when Generating Non-O3 Source Gas

Instrument Chassis

Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH

(1.0 LPM)
gry

Pressure
Regulator O3 GAS INPUT
O3 FLOW
SENSOR

PRESSURE SENSOR
DILUENT
GENERATOR

O3 Generator Assembly

INLET grn PHOTOMETER

grn
PRESSURE SENSOR On Back Panel
DILUENT
O3

Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER vio PHOTOMETER

brn PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA INLET

REF/MEAS vio
Flow Control Valve
ON (800 cm 3)
Flow Control

Purge brn brn

(100 cm 3)

Valve
wht
DILUENT Diluent ON wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE Mass Flow Controller ZERO IN

INLET SENSOR
INPUT GAS

O3 Gen
PCA

PHOTOMETER
CAL GAS 2 Valve
CAL GAS ZERO OUT
INLET gry
PRESSURE
SENSOR INTERNAL
red blk VENT
CAL GAS 3 blk
INLET EXHAUST
orn GPT
Valve
CAL GAS 4
orn OFF PHOTOMETER
INLET OUTLET
yel
yel red
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel) yel CAL GAS
Cal Gas OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
GPT blu
OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 3-4. T700U Gas Flow and T700 with O3 Options when Generating O3

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 111
 Modes in the Generate menu are illustrated in Figure 3-5, briefly described in Table 3-1,
and detailed in Sections 3.2.1 through 3.2.9.

Figure 3-5. Modes in the Generate Menu

3.2.1. GENERATE > AUTO: BASIC GENERATION OF CALIBRATION MIXTURES

The AUTO mode can be used to generate ozone as a calibration gas for performing
calibrations and calibration checks on ambient ozone analyzers. This is the simplest
procedure for generating calibration gas mixtures. In this mode, the user makes four
choices (Figure 3-6):
• type of component gas to be used from the list of gases selected during
configuration in the Setup>Gas menu (Section 2.4.4);
• target concentration
• units of measure
• flow rate to be output by the calibrator

112 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Note In the T700U, when generating very low levels of ozone, care
must be taken to ensure that the concentration-flow product is
kept above the 20 ppb*LPM minimum value. This value is the
target concentration (in ppb) multiplied by the total flow value.
Example: To determine the minimum flow rate required to
generate 3 ppb:
3 ppb * X LPM > 20 ppb*LPM
or
X LPM > (20 ppb * LPM) / (3 ppb) = 6.7 LPM
Therefore, the flow rate should be a minimum of 6.7 LPM to
generate 3 ppb.
These equations can be used to determine the minimum flow
rate for any desired concentration.

Figure 3-6. Auto Generate Calibration Mixtures

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 113
 Using this information, the Calibrator automatically calculates and sets the individual flow
rates for the Diluent and chosen component gases to create the desired calibration mixture.

3.2.2. GENERATE > MANUAL: GENERATING CALIBRATION MIXTURES

MANUALLY
This mode provides the user with more control of the gas mixture process. Unlike the
AUTO mode, MANUAL mode requires the user set the both the component gas flow rate
and diluent air flow rate (see Figure 3-7). This allows the user control over the mixing ratio
and total calibration gas flow rate.

Figure 3-7. Generate>Manual Menu

In addition, if the Calibrator is equipped with the optional O3 Generator (with or without
optional Photometer), and O3 is to be included in the calibration mixture (e.g. using the
GPT or GPTPS features), the user also needs to set the ozone generator mode and set point
see Figure 3-8.
However, start with computations for the desired settings, as presented in this section.

114 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Figure 3-8. Generate>Manual with Ozone Generator

The TOTAL FLOW is defined by the user depending on system requirements.

Note The minimum total flow should equal 150% of the flow
requirements of all of the instruments to which the
calibrator will be supplying calibration gas.
Example: If the calibrator is to supply calibration gas
mixtures simultaneously to a system composed of three
analyzers, each requiring 2 LPM, the proper Total Flow
output should be set at: (2 + 2 + 2) x 1.5 = 9.000 LPM.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 115
 3.2.2.1. DETERMINING THE SOURCE GAS FLOW RATE
To determine the required flow rate of the component source gas, use the following
formula:
Equation 3-1
C f × Totalflow
GASflow =
Ci
WHERE:
Cf = target concentration of diluted gas
Ci = concentration of the source gas
GASflow = source gas flow rate

EXAMPLE:
• A target concentration of 200 ppm of SO2 is needed.
• The Concentration of the SO2 Source is 600 ppm
• The requirement of the system are 9.000 LPM
• The required source gas flow rate would be:
GASflow = (200 ppm x 9.000 LPM) ÷ 600 ppm
GASflow = 1800.000 ppm/LPM) ÷ 600 ppm
GASflow = 3.000 LPM

116 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 3.2.2.2. DETERMINING DILUENT FLOW RATE
To determine the required flow rate of the diluent gas use the following formula:
Equation 3-2
DILflow = Totalflow - GASflow
WHERE:
GASflow = source gas flow rate (from Equation 6-1)
Totalflow = total gas flow requirements of the system
DILflow = required diluent gas flow
EXAMPLE:
• If the requirement of the system is 9.000 LPM,
• The source gas flow rate is set at 3.00 LPM.
• The required source gas flow rate would be:
DILflow = 9.0 LPM – 3.0 LPM
DILflow = 6.0 LPM

3.2.2.3. DETERMINING DILUENT FLOW RATE WITH O3 GENERATOR OPTION

INSTALLED
If the optional O3 generator is installed and in use, Equation 6.2 will be slightly different,
since the O3flow is a constant value and can be configured for display in a Home page meter
or in the Dashboard. A typical value for O3flow is 105 cm3/min.
Equation 3-3
DILflow = Totalflow - O3 flow
WHERE:
GASflow = source gas flow rate (from Equation 6-1)
Totalflow = total gas flow requirements of the system.
O3 flow = the flow rate set for the O3 generator; a constant value (typically
about 0.105 LPM)
DILflow = required diluent gas flow
EXAMPLE:
• If the requirement of the system are 9.000 LPM,
• The source gas flow rate is set at 3.00 LPM.
• The required source gas flow rate would be:
DILflow-= 9.0 LPM – 0.105 LPM
DILflow = 8.895 LPM

Note It is not recommended that any flow rate be set to <10% or

>100% of the full scale rating of that associated mass flow
controller.
For calibrators with multiple MFCs installed, their
combined flow potential is available within limits:
<10% of the lowest rated MFC or >100% of the combined
full-scale ratings for both mass flow controllers. The
calibrator automatically selects the MFC with the lowest
flow rate that can accommodate the requested flow,
thereby affording the most precise flow control. If no
single MFC can accommodate the requested flow rate,
then multiple mass flow controllers are used.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 117
 3.2.2.4. SETTING SOURCE GAS AND DILUENT FLOW RATES USING THE
GENERATE > MANUAL MENU
After determining the flow values with the equations provided above, press the MANUAL
button and edit the flow values as needed for the Cal and Dil fields, respectively (Figure 3-7).

3.2.3. GENERATE > PURGE: ACTIVATING THE CALIBRATOR’S PURGE FEATURE

The calibrator’s PURGE feature clears the instrument’s internal pneumatics of residual
source gases and calibration mixtures previously generated, as well as any external
pneumatic lines downstream from the calibrator.
When activated, the PURGE feature:
• Opens the Diluent (zero air) inlet valve allowing zero air to flow into the
calibrator form its external, pressurized source;
• Adjusts the diluent air mass flow controller (MFC1) to maximum flow;
• Adjusts all of the component gas mass flow controllers installed in the
calibrator to maximum flows, 10 SLPM and 100 SCCPM accordingly, to
flush out the pneumatic system of the calibrator.
To activate the PURGE feature, press the PURGE button in the Generate page.
The PURGE air is vented through the VENT port of the rear panel of the instrument (see
Figure 2-2).

Table 3-4. Internal Pneumatics during Purge Mode

VALVES PHOT
MFCS
MODE
(X = CLOSED; O = OPEN; D = DEENERGIZED; E = ENERGIZED) PUMP
CY CYL CYL CYL PHOT
PURGE DILUENT GPT O3 GEN CAL1 CAL21 DILUENT
L1 2 3 4 M/R

Purge X X X X O O E E Switching ON3 ON3 ON ON

1
Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.
2
The valve associated with the cylinder containing the chosen source gas is open.
3
In instrument with multiple MFCs the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested.

118 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 T700 Chassis

Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH

(1.0 LPM)
gry

O3 FLOW
SENSOR
Pressure
Regulator O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR
DILUENT

O3 Generator Assembly
GENERATOR
INLET grn PHOTOMETER
grn
PRESSURE SENSOR On Back Panel
DILUENT

O3
Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER vio PHOTOMETER
brn PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA INLET

REF/MEAS vio
Flow Control Valve
(800 cm3)

Flow Control
Purge brn brn

(100 cm3)
Valve wht
DILUENT Diluent PUMP wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE Mass Flow Controller ZERO IN

INLET SENSOR
INPUT GAS

O3 Gen
PCA

PHOTOMETER
CAL GAS 2 Valve
ZERO OUT
INLET gry
CAL GAS INTERNAL
PRESSURE red blk VENT
CAL GAS 3 SENSOR blk
INLET EXHAUST
GPT
orn
Valve
CAL GAS 4
orn
PHOTOMETER
INLET OUTLET
yel
yel red
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel) yel CAL GAS
Cal Gas OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
GPT blu
OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 3-9. Gas Flow with O3 Options during Purge mode

Important IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA

This Purge feature does not stop automatically. Manually
press the Standby button to stop the purging process.

3.2.4. GENERATE: GAS PHASE TITRATION (GPT) CALIBRATION

In Gas Phase Titration, it is important to know the following information:
• the principles of gas phase titration
• how to choose an input concentration for the NO gas
• the target concentration for the O3
• how to determine the total flow for the GPT calibration mixtures
• the order of operation to ensure greatest accuracy: GPTZ, GPTPS, GPT

3.2.4.1. MEETING THE USEPA GUIDELINES FOR GPT CALIBRATION

The USEPA has published guidelines for the pneumatic parameters involving GPT
calibrations. These guidelines are meant to ensure that the O3/NO reaction is complete,
and that the risk of producing other un-wanted reactions is minimized. These guidelines
are published in the U.S. 40 CFR pt. 50, appendix F. In this appendix are requirements for
the Residence Time in the reaction volume as well as a Dynamic Parameter specification.
For the purposes of calculating these parameters, the volume of the GPT reaction chamber
is 130 cc.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 119
 3.2.4.2. GPT THEORY
The principle of GPT is based on the rapid gas phase reaction between NO and O3, which
produces quantities of NO2 as shown by the following equation:
Equation 4-4
→ NO2 + O2 + hν ( light )
NO + O3 
It has been empirically determined that under controlled circumstances the NO-O3 reaction
is very efficient (<1% residual O3), therefore the concentration of NO2 resulting from the
mixing of NO and O3 can be precisely predicted and controlled as long as the following
conditions are met:
• The amount of O3 used in the mixture is known.
• The amount of NO used in the mixture is AT LEAST 10% greater than the
amount of O3 (per EPA requirements) in the mixture.
• The volume of the mixing chamber is known (130 cc, as previously stated).
• The NO and O3 flow rates (from which the time the two gases are in the mixing
chamber) are low enough to give a residence time of the reactants in the mixing
chamber of >2.75 ppm min.
Given the above conditions, the amount of NO2 being output by the calibrator will be equal
(at a 1:1 ratio) to the amount of O3 added.
Once the user has determined the appropriate flow and NO gas bottle required, performing
the GPT is as simple as entering the following parameters in the GPT menu:
• desired Ozone concentration
• desired NO concentration
• desired Total Flow Rate (see recommendation in Section 3.2.4.3 below)
Since the O3 flow rate of the calibrator’s O3 generator is a set fixed value (typically about
0.105 LPM), the calibrator will calculate the additional flow required from the zero air
MFC from the user’s Total Gas Flow entry in the Generate menu. The NO MFC flow rate
will be determined based on the NO concentration and the total flow rate.
For multi-point (M-P) NO2 checks, TAPI recommends keeping the NO concentration and
Total Flow Rate constant and only adjusting the Ozone concentration for each of the NO2
concentrations needed, keeping in mind the guidelines mentioned above.

3.2.4.3. DETERMINING THE TOTAL FLOW FOR GPT CALIBRATION MIXTURES

The total flow rate is defined by the user depending on system requirements.
The minimum total flow should equal 150% of the flow requirements of all of the
instruments to which the calibrator will be supplying calibration gas.
EXAMPLE:

• If the calibrator is will be expected to supply calibration gas mixtures

simultaneously to a system in composed of three analyzers each requiring 2
LPM, the proper Total Flow output should be set at:
• (2 + 2 + 2) x 1.5 = 9.000 LPM

120 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Note It is not recommended to set any flow rate to <10% or
>100% of the full scale rating of that associated mass flow
controller.
For calibrators with multiple MFCs installed, their
combined flow potential is available within limits:
<10% of the lowest rated MFC or >100% of the combined
full-scale ratings for both mass flow controllers. The
calibrator automatically selects the MFC with the lowest
flow rate that can accommodate the requested flow,
thereby affording the most precise flow control. If no
single MFC can accommodate the requested flow rate,
then multiple mass flow controllers are used.

Given this information, the calibrator determines the NO gas flow by the formula:
Equation 4-5
C NO 2 × Totalflow
NO GASflow =
C NO
WHERE:
CNO2 = target concentration for the NO2 output
CNO = concentration of the NO gas input
NO GASflow = NO source gas flow rate

And the diluent (zero air) gas flow by the formula:

Equation 4-6
DILflow = Totalflow - NO GASflow - O3 flow
WHERE:
GASflow = source gas flow rate (from Equation 6-1)
Totalflow = total gas flow requirements of the system.
O3 flow = the flow rate set for the O3 generator; a constant value
(typically about 0.105 LPM)
DILflow = required diluent gas flow

3.2.5. GENERATE > GPTZ: PERFORMING A GAS PHASE TITRATION ZERO

The GPTZ feature is used for obtaining the baseline NO and NOX readings for calculating
the NOX converter efficiency (CE); it simulates the flow condition of GPT without
generating ozone, which provides accuracy of GPT. (These readings are referred to as
[NO]orig and [NOX]orig , respectively in the EPA calibration guidelines).
During GPTZ, NO gas is generated in the same manner as a GPT calibration, except the
the O3 generator lamp is not energized, thus producing no O3. This allows accurate
measurement of the baseline NO and NOX readings from the instrument under test.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 121
 3.2.5.1. GPTZ VS AUTO GENERATE MODES
It may appear that the GPTZ and AUTO Generation modes are performing the same
function: generating NO cal gas at a specified concentration and flow rate. However, there
is an important difference in the flow configuration of these two modes.
In GPTZ mode, the total flow includes flow from the (un-energized) O3 generator. This
flow is not directly measured by the calibrator. The O3 generator flow is measured at the
factory and programmed into the calibrator and assumed to be constant thereafter. Since
pressure and temperature changes between the factory cal and the customer’s ambient
conditions cannot be accounted for, there may be small discrepancies between the actual
O3 generator flow and the assumed flow that is used in the dilution calculations that the
calibrator performs. Since these small flow discrepancies are present in both the GPTZ
and GPT modes, they do not affect the accuracy of the converter efficiency calculations.
For the best overall dilution accuracy, for span calibrations for instance, the AUTO mode
should still be used.

3.2.5.2. CALIBRATOR GPTZ OPERATION

The following table and figure show the status of the calibrator’s internal pneumatic
components and internal gas flow when the instrument is in GPTZ generating mode.

Table 3-5. Status of Internal Pneumatics during GENERATE > GPTZ Mode
VALVES2 PHOT
MFCs3
MODE
(X = CLOSED; O = OPEN; D = DEENERGIZED; E = ENERGIZED) PUMP
CYL CYL CYL CYL O3
PURGE DILUENT GPT PHOT M/R CAL1 CAL21 DILUENT
1 2 3 4 GEN

GPTZ X X X X X O E D Ref Phase ON ON ON OFF

1
Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.
2
The valve associated with the cylinder containing NO source gas is open.
3
In instruments with multiple MFCs the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested.

122 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Instrument Chassis

Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH

(1.0 LPM)
gry

Pressure
Regulator O3 GAS INPUT

O3 FLOW
SENSOR
PRESSURE SENSOR
DILUENT

GENERATOR

O3 Generator Assembly
INLET grn PHOTOMETER
grn
PRESSURE SENSOR On Back Panel
DILUENT

O3
Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER vio PHOTOMETER
brn PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA INLET

ON Flow Control
REF/MEAS
Valve
vio

(800 cm 3)

Flow Control
Purge brn brn

(100 cm 3)
Valve
wht
DILUENT Diluent OFF wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE Mass Flow Controller ZERO IN

INLET SENSOR
INPUT GAS

O3 Gen
PCA

PHOTOMETER
CAL GAS 2 Valve
CAL GAS ZERO OUT
INLET gry
PRESSURE
SENSOR INTERNAL
red blk VENT
CAL GAS 3 blk
INLET EXHAUST
orn GPT
Valve
CAL GAS 4
orn ON PHOTOMETER
INLET OUTLET
yel
yel red
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel) yel CAL GAS
Cal Gas OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
GPT blu
OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 3-10. Gas Flow during GPTZ Mode

3.2.5.3. INITIATING A GPTZ

To activate the GPTZ feature you will need to know:
• Total Gas Flow for the mixture output
• Target O3 concentration (equal to the target NO2 concentration being
simulated)
• The NO source gas concentration
In the Generate menu, press the GPTZ button and edit the applicable fields, then press the
Generate button.

3.2.6. GENERATE > GPTPS: PERFORMING A GAS PHASE TITRATION PRE-SET

The GPT Pres-Set (GPTPS) feature is used to fine-tune the ozone generator calibration to
improve the accuracy of the O3 concentration prior to running GPT. (In the T700 this
function is only available if the optional O3 photometer is installed). GPTPS simulates a
GPT mixing operation in order to determine the exact output of the calibrator’s O3
generator. As described in Section 3.2.4.1, all other things being equal, the concentration
of the NO2 being generated using the GPT feature will be equal to the amount of O3 used.
Therefore, the more accurately the O3 generator performs, the more accurate the NO2
output will be.
When operating in GPTPS mode, diluent gas (zero air) is substituted for the NO gas that
would be mixed with the O3 in normal GPT mode. The resulting unaffected O3 output of
the O3 generator is shunted through the calibrator’s internal photometer, which measures
the ACTUAL O3 concentration in the gas.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 123
 Once the exact O3 concentration being output by the generator is determined, the
calibrator’s software adjusts the O3 drive voltage up or down (“O3 Gen Drive” parameter
can be viewed in the Dashboard and/or a Home Page Meter), so that the output of the
generator matches as closely as possible the target concentration requested. This adjusted
generator setting will be used during any subsequent real GPT operation that uses the same
target NO2 value.

Note The calibrator has a learning algorithm during the O3

generation (see Section 3.2) or Gas Phase Titration Pre-
Set Mode (GPTPS) (Sections 3.2.7.2 and 3.2.5). It may take
up to one hour for each new concentration/flow (point) that
is entered into the instrument. Once the instrument has
several points memorized in its cache, any new point that
is entered will automatically be estimated within ±1% error
(with photometer) and ±10% error (with O3 generator and
GPTPS).
This adjustment is only valid for the O3 concentration used
during the Pre-Set operation. GPT Presets must be re-run
for each different target NO2 value.

In order to keep the resulting concentration of O3 consistent with the GPT mixture being
simulated, the instrument’s software adjusts the flow rate of the diluent gas to substitute an
amount of diluent gas equal to the amount of NO gas that would normally be used.

3.2.6.1. CALIBRATOR GPTPS OPERATION

The following table and figures show the status of the calibrator’s internal pneumatic
components and internal gas flow when the instrument is in GPTPS generating modes.

Table 3-6. Status of Internal Pneumatics during GENERATE > GPTPS Mode
VALVES2 PHOT
MFCs3
MODE
(X = CLOSED; O = OPEN; D = DEENERGIZED; E = ENERGIZED) PUMP
CYL CYL CYL CYL O3
PURGE DILUENT GPT PHOT M/R CAL1 CAL21 DILUENT
1 2 3 4 GEN

GPTPS X X X X X O E E Switching OFF OFF ON ON

1
Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.
2
The valve associated with the cylinder containing NO source gas is open.
3
In instrument with multiple MFCs the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested.

124 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Instrument Chassis

Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH

(1.0 LPM)
gry

Pressure
Regulator O3 GAS INPUT

O3 FLOW
SENSOR
PRESSURE SENSOR
DILUENT

GENERATOR

O3 Generator Assembly
INLET grn PHOTOMETER
grn
PRESSURE SENSOR On Back Panel
DILUENT

O3
Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER vio PHOTOMETER
brn PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA INLET

ON Flow Control
REF/MEAS
Valve
vio

(800 cm3)

Flow Control
Purge brn brn

(100 cm3)
Valve wht
DILUENT Diluent ON wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE Mass Flow Controller ZERO IN

INLET SENSOR
INPUT GAS

O3 Gen
PCA

PHOTOMETER
CAL GAS 2 Valve
CAL GAS ZERO OUT
INLET gry
PRESSURE
SENSOR INTERNAL
red blk VENT
CAL GAS 3 blk
INLET EXHAUST
orn GPT
Valve
CAL GAS 4
orn OFF PHOTOMETER
INLET OUTLET
yel
yel red
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel) yel CAL GAS
Cal Gas OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
GPT blu
OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 3-11. Gas Flow during GPTPS Mode

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 125
 3.2.6.2. INITIATING A GPTPS
To activate the GPTPS feature you will need to know the values for the following
parameters that will be entered for the subsequent GPT (if a multi-point GPT will be run,
then a separate GPTPS should be run for each O3 concentration point:
• The Total Gas Flow for the mixture output
• The Target O3 concentration (equal to the target NO2 concentration being
simulated)
• The NO source gas concentration
In the Generate menu, press the GPTPS button and edit the applicable fields, then press the
Generate button.

3.2.7. GENERATE > GPT: PERFORMING A GAS PHASE TITRATION

The GPT mode is used for performing the actual NO + O3 titration used to produce the
NO2 test gas.

3.2.7.1. CALIBRATOR GPT OPERATION

The following table and figures show the status of the calibrator’s internal pneumatic
components and internal gas flow when the instrument is in GPT generating modes.

Table 3-7. Status of Internal Pneumatics during GENERATE > GPT Mode
VALVES
MFCs PHOT
(X = Closed; O = Open; D = Deenergized; E = Energized)
MODE PUMP
CYL CYL CYL CYL O3
PURGE DILUENT GPT PHOT M/R CAL1 CAL21 DILUENT
1 2 3 4 GEN
Reference
GPT O2 O2 O2 O2 X O E E Phase ON3 ON3 ON OFF
1
Only present if multiple cal gas MFC option is installed.
2
The valve associated with the cylinder containing NO source gas is open.
3
In instrument with multiple MFCs the CPU chooses which MFC to use depending on the target gas flow requested.

126 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Instrument Chassis

Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH

(1.0 LPM)
gry

Pressure
Regulator O3 GAS INPUT

O3 FLOW
SENSOR
PRESSURE SENSOR
DILUENT

GENERATOR

O3 Generator Assembly
INLET grn PHOTOMETER
grn
PRESSURE SENSOR On Back Panel
DILUENT

O3
Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER vio PHOTOMETER
brn PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA INLET

ON Flow Control
REF/MEAS
Valve
vio

(800 cm3)

Flow Control
Purge brn brn

(100 cm3)
Valve wht
DILUENT Diluent OFF wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE Mass Flow Controller ZERO IN

INLET SENSOR
INPUT GAS

O3 Gen
PCA

PHOTOMETER
CAL GAS 2 Valve
CAL GAS ZERO OUT
INLET gry
PRESSURE
SENSOR INTERNAL
red blk VENT
CAL GAS 3 blk
INLET
orn GPT EXHAUST

ON Valve

CAL GAS 4
orn
PHOTOMETER
INLET OUTLET
yel
yel red
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel) yel CAL GAS
Cal Gas OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
GPT blu
OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 3-12. Gas Flow during GPT Mode

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 127
 3.2.7.2. INITIATING A GPT CALIBRATION GAS GENERATION

Note It is highly recommended that a GPTZ (Section 3.2.5) be

performed and followed by a GPTPS (Section 3.2.6) prior
to initiating any GPT gas generation.

To initiate GPT gas generation you will need to know:

• Total Flow for the mixture output
• Target O3 concentration (equal to the target NO2 concentration to be
generated)
• NO source gas concentration
The following requirements should be used for determining total flow:
• Instrument’s Flow Demand
The number and flow rate requirements of the instruments sampling from
the output of the calibrator. The flow demand of all instruments connected
to the test manifold, even those not directly involved in the testing, must
be taken into account. The minimum output flow rate should be calculated
as the sum of all instrument demand flows plus 10% minimum excess.
• Target O3 Concentration
The output flow must be chosen to keep the O3 generator output above
the minimum specification of 20 PPB * LPM. The minimum flow rate (FT)
can then be calculated using the following equation:

20 ppb • LPM
FT ≥
O3Conc

• NO Flow Requirements
To achieve a reasonable response time during the GPT and to
satisfy the EPA requirement(1) (2) that the residence time in the GPT
reaction chamber be less than two minutes, the NO flow rate should
be greater than 45 cc/min. Therefore, larger dilution flows may be
required to achieve low concentrations of NO. An appropriate NO
gas bottle concentration must be used in order to achieve this flow
rate.

In the Generate menu, press the GPT button and edit the applicable fields, then press the
Generate button.

128 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 3.2.8. GENERATE > SEQUENCE
Sequences, a set of calibration steps for serial execution, are configured in the
Setup>Sequences menu (Section 2.6.7). To execute a Sequence, navigate to the Generate
menu (Figure 3-5), press the SEQUENCE button, and select the desired Sequence, then
press the Generate button.

3.2.9. GENERATE > LEVEL

Levels, operational functions for LEADS (Section 2.6.8.1), are configured in the
Setup>Levels menu (Section 2.6.8). To execute a Level, navigate to the Generate menu
(Figure 3-5), press the LEVEL button, and select the desired Level, then press the Generate
button.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 129
4. COMMUNICATIONS AND REMOTE OPERATION
The instrument rear panel connections include an Ethernet port, a USB port (option) and
two serial communications ports (labeled RS232, which is the COM1 port, and COM2)
located on the rear panel (refer to Figure 2-2). These ports allow the ability to communicate
with, issue commands to, and receive data from the analyzer through an external computer
system or terminal.
This Section provides pertinent information regarding communication equipment, the
communications ports, and communications protocol. Data acquisition is set up through
the Datalogger (Section 2.6).

4.1. DATA TERMINAL/COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT (DTE DCE)

RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment
(DTE) and data communication equipment (DCE). Basic terminals always fall into the
DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices. The difference
between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions.
• DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3.
• DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.
To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals (DTE), modems (DCE) and computers
(which can be either), a switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel, labeled
DCE DTE, allows the user to set the RS-232 configuration for one of these two data
devices. This switch exchanges the Receive and Transmit lines on RS-232 emulating a
cross-over or null-modem cable. The switch has no effect on COM2.

4.2. MODES, BAUD RATE AND SERIAL COMMUNICATION

Referring to Table 2-15, use the SETUP>COMM menu to configure COM1 (labeled
RS232 on instrument rear panel) and/or COM2 (labeled COM2 on instrument rear panel)
for communication modes, baud rate and serial communications. If using a USB option
communication connection, setup requires the instrument’s baud rate to match your
personal computer baud rate.

4.2.1. SERIAL COMMUNICATION: RS-232

The RS232 and COM2 communications (COMM) ports operate on the RS-232 protocol
(default configuration). Configurations for these two COM ports (Section 2.6.11.1) are:
• RS232 port can also be configured to operate in single or RS-232 Multidrop
mode (Option 62); refer to Section .
• COM2 port can be left in its default configuration for standard RS-232
operation including multidrop, or it can be reconfigured for half-duplex RS-
485 operation (please contact the factory for this configuration).

130 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Note When the rear panel COM2 port is in use, except for
multidrop communication, the rear panel USB port cannot
be used. (Alternatively, when the USB port is enabled,
COM2 port cannot be used except for multidrop).

A code-activated switch (CAS), can also be used on either port to connect typically
between 2 and 16 send/receive instruments (host computer(s) printers, data loggers,
analyzers, monitors, calibrators, etc.) into one communications hub. Contact Teledyne API
Sales (front cover, this manual) for more information on CAS systems.

4.2.2. SERIAL COMMUNICATION: RS-485 (OPTION)

The COM2 port of the instrument’s rear panel is set up for RS-232 communication but can
be reconfigured for RS-485 communication. Contact Technical Support for reconfiguration
unless this option was elected at the time of purchase, then the rear panel was preconfigured
at the factory.

4.3. ETHERNET
When using the Ethernet interface, the analyzer can be connected to any standard 10BaseT
or 100BaseT Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches or routers. The
interface operates as a standard TCP/IP device on port 3000. This allows a remote computer
to connect through the network to the analyzer using NumaView™ Remote, terminal
emulators or other programs.
The Ethernet connector has two LEDs that are on the connector itself, indicating its current
operating status.

Table 4-1. Ethernet Status Indicators

LED FUNCTION
amber (link) On when connection to the LAN is valid.
green (activity) Flickers during any activity on the LAN.

4.4. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL

The following set of instructions assumes that the user is familiar with MODBUS
communications, and provides minimal information to get started. For additional
instruction, please refer to the Teledyne API MODBUS manual, PN 06276. Also refer to
www.modbus.org for MODBUS communication protocols.
Minimum Requirements:
• instrument firmware with MODBUS capabilities installed
• MODBUS-compatible software (TAPI uses MODBUS Poll for testing; see
www.modbustools.com)
• personal computer
• Communications cable (Ethernet or USB or RS232).
• Possibly a null modem adapter or cable.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 131
 4.4.1.1. MODBUS COM PORT CONFIGURATION
MODBUS communications can be configured for transmission over Ethernet or serial
COM port through the Setup>Comm menu. Make the appropriate cable connections
(Ethernet or COM port) between the instrument and a PC.
Ethernet: MODBUS is available on TCP port 502. By default, port 502 is assigned to
the instrument’s TCP Port 2. In the Setup>Comm> TCP Port menu, check
to see that it is set to “502” (Figure 4-1).

Figure 4-1. MODBUS via Ethernet

Serial COM: Both COM1 (labeled “RS232” on the instrument’s rear panel) and COM2
are configurable for RS-232 or RS-485 communication with either
MODBUS RTU or MODBUS ASCII transmission modes. In the
Setup>Comm COM1[COM2] menu, edit the Protocol parameter to select a
MODBUS transmission mode; edit Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits, etc., if
necessary (see descriptions in Table 2-15).

Important When using MODBUS RTU, ensure that the

COM1[COM2] Handshaking Mode is set to either
Hardware or OFF. Do NOT set it to Software.

Press the Accept button to apply the settings. (Figure 4-2 shows an example
for MODBUS RTU).

132 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Figure 4-2. MODBUS via Serial Communication (example)

Important When more than one analyzer is connected to the

network, create a unique identification number for
each in the Setup>Vars>Instrument ID menu.

Next, for the settings to take effect, power off the analyzer, wait 5 seconds, and power it
on again.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 133
5. CALIBRATION AND VERIFICATION
Basic electronic calibration of the Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is performed at the factory.
Normally there is no need to perform this factory calibration in the field; however, the
performance of several of the instrument’s key subsystems should be verified periodically
and adjusted if necessary. These subsystems are:
• Mass Flow Controllers: The accuracy of the mass flow controller outputs is
intrinsic to achieving the correct calibration mixture concentrations; therefore,
the accuracy of their output should be checked and if necessary adjusted
every 6 months (see Section 5.1).
• O3 Photometer: If your calibrator is equipped with the optional O3
photometer, its performance should be periodically verified against and
external transfer standard (see Section 5.2).
• O3 Generator: If your calibrator is equipped with the optional O3 generator, it
should be periodically calibrated (see Section 5.3).

5.1. VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE MFCS

View the parameters for each MFC under the Utilities>Diagnostics menu.

Figure 5-1. MFC Performance Statistics

134 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 The Flow Table for each MFC sets its output at each of 20 equally spaced control points
along its entire performance range. In the Utilities>Diagnostics menu view the FlowTable
field for each MFC by clicking the Edit Table button. For each calibration point, the
following is displayed:
• The drive voltage in 20 equal, incremental steps from 0 mVDC to 5000
mVDC;
• The expected flow rate corresponding to each drive voltage point (each equal
to1/20th of the full scale for the selected mass flow controller).
This table can also be used to calibrate the output of the MFCs by adjusting either the
control voltage of a point or its associated flow output value (see Section 5.1.2).

Table 5-1. Examples of MFC Calibration Points

MFC FULL SCALE
CAL DRIVE
1.0 LPM 3.0 LPM 5.0 LPM 10.0 LPM
POINT VOLTAGE
MFC TARGET OUTPUT
0 000 mV 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
1 250 mV 0.050 0.150 0.250 0.500
2 500 mV 0.100 0.300 0.500 1.000
3 750 mV 0.150 0.450 0.750 1.500
4 1000 mV 0.200 0.600 1.000 2.000
5 1250 mV 0.250 0.750 1.250 2.500
6 1500 mV 0.300 0.900 1.500 3.000
7 1750 mV 0.350 1.050 1.750 3.500
8 2000 mV 0.400 1.200 2.000 4.000
9 2250 mV 0.450 1.350 2.250 4.500
10 2500 mV 0.500 1.500 2.500 5.000
11 2750 mV 0.550 1.650 2.750 5.500
12 3000 mV 0.600 1.800 3.000 6.000
13 3250 mV 0.650 1.950 3.250 6.500
14 3500 mV 0.700 2.100 3.500 7.000
15 3750 mV 0.750 2.250 3.750 7.500
16 4000 mV 0.800 2.400 4.000 8.000
17 4250 mV 0.850 2.550 4.250 8.500
18 4500 mV 0.900 2.700 4.500 9.000
19 4750 mV 0.950 2.850 4.750 9.500
20 5000 mV 1.000 3.000 5.000 10.000

5.1.1. SETUP FOR VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE MFCS

Note A separate flow meter is required for the procedure.

1. Turn off the calibrator.

2. Open the calibrator’s front panel for easiest access to the MFC output ports.
3. Attach the flow meter directly to the output port of the MFC to be checked/tested.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 135
 Input Gas
GPT
Chamber
Pressure
Sensor
PCA

PHOTOMETER GPT
Valve

Front Panel

Outlet Port for Outlet Port for Outlet Port for

Optional 2nd Cal Gas Cal Gas Diluent ON / OFF
Mass Flow Controller Mass Flow Controller Mass Flow Controller Switch

Figure 5-2. Location of MFC Outlet Ports

4. Turn ON power to the calibrator.

5. Ensure the calibrator is in Standby mode (change in Generate page if needed).

5.1.2. VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE MFCS

Once the external flow meter is connected to the output of the MFC being
verified/calibrated, perform the following steps (refer to Figure 5-3):
1. In the Diagnostics menu select the MFC to be tested and press the Edit Table
button in the Flow Table field.
2. Check the Enable Drive box to start the flow.
3. Scroll to each calibration point in the table and check that the external flow
meter is reading within 1% of the value in the flow table (± flow meter
accuracy):
a. If it is, scroll to the next calibration point in the flow table and repeat.
b. If not, press the Edit Flow button and adjust the flow value to match that
of the external flow meter
4. If any flow values were adjusted in Step 3, press the Apply button. (If changes
were made without pressing the Apply button, a prompt will appear when the
Done button is pressed, asking whether to save the changes).
5. Press the Done button when adjustments are completed; this will stop the flow
and return to the Diagnostics menu.

136 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Figure 5-3. MFC Calibration

5.2. VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE O3 PHOTOMETER (BENCH)

OPTION
For calibrators equipped with the O3 photometer option (also called sensor or bench), the
accuracy of calibration mixtures involving O3 produced by the calibrator depends entirely
on the accuracy of the photometer; therefore, it is very important to verify its accuracy and
calibrate if necessary. Figure 5-4 illustrates the setup for performance verification, and
Section 5.2.2 describes the steps to run the verification. If calibration is required, Sections
5.2.3 and 5.2.4 provide instructions.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 137
 5.2.1. SETUP FOR VERIFYING O3 PHOTOMETER (OPTION) PERFORMANCE
Note This operation requires an external reference photometer.

Set up the calibrator and reference photometer as illustrated in Figure 5-4.

PHOTOMETER INLET
PHOTOMETER OUTLET

PHOTOMETER ZERO IN
PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT
Max Length=3 meters ( or 10 feet)
EXHAUST
CYL1
CYL2 VENT

CYL3 CAL OUT capped

Calibration
CAL OUT If the gas flow on
Source Gas CYL4 this line is
Connections T700 ≥ 5 SLPM the
minimum O.D.
Mass Flow must be 3/8 inch

Enclosure Wall
DILUENT IN
Calibrator

REFERENCE Sample Port Connect to same

PHOTOMETER Zero Port zero air source as
the T700

Figure 5-4. Set up for Verifying Optional O3 Photometer Performance

5.2.2. VERIFYING O3 PHOTOMETER (OPTION) PERFORMANCE

To verify the performance of the optional internal photometer, place the calibrator in
Standby mode (in Generate menu), and perform the following steps (refer to Figure 5-5):
1. In the Generate menu press the AUTO button.
2. In the pop-up window press the button in the Gas field.
3. Change the Gas to O3, and set the target concentration, units of measure, and
total flow as desired.
4. Press the Generate button, and see the target settings in the upper portion of
the display.
5. Go to Home page and wait about 10 minutes or more until the reading under
“Actual” stabilizes before comparing that value to the reading of the reference
photometer to ensure they are within 1% of each other (If not, calibrate per
Sections 5.2.3 and 5.2.4).

138 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Figure 5-5. O3 Photometer Performance Verification

5.2.3. SETUP FOR CALIBRATING THE O3 PHOTOMETER (BENCH) OPTION

Note This procedure requires external sources for zero air and
O3 as an external reference photometer.

Calibrating the optional internal photometer requires a different set up than that used during
the normal operation of the calibrator. There are two ways to make the connections between
these instruments and the calibrator: either with direct connections (Section 5.2.3.1) or with
calibration manifolds (Section 5.2.3.2).

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 139
 5.2.3.1. SETUP USING DIRECT CONNECTIONS
Create the setup as illustrated in Figure 5-6, which shows the external Zero air and O3
sources as well as the reference photometer connected directly to the fixtures on the
calibrator’s rear panel.

External Zero Air Source

REFERENCE
PHOTOMETER

External O3 Source

PHOTOMETER INLET
PHOTOMETER OUTLET
Capped
PHOTOMETER ZERO IN
PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT
Capped
Vent line
EXHAUST
CYL1 Max Length=3 meters ( or 10 feet)

Calibration CYL2
VENT
Source Gas CYL3
CAL OUT
connections are CYL4
CAL OUT
as shown in
If the gas flow on this
Section 3.2 line is ≥ 5 SLPM
DILUENT IN the minimum O.D.
Calibrator must be 3/8 inch

Enclosure Wall
CAL OUT gas outlet
connections to
manifolds/instruments

Figure 5-6. External Photometer Validation Setup – Direct Connections

Note A minimum of 1.1 LPM is required for the external zero air
source.

140 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 5.2.3.2. SETUP USING A CALIBRATION MANIFOLD
Create the setup as illustrated in Figure 5-7, which shows the external zero air and O3
sources as well as the reference photometer connected to the calibrator via calibration
manifolds for both Zero air and O3.
Enclosure Wall

External O3 Source External Zero Air Source

ZERO AIR CALIBRATION MANIFOLD

REFERENCE
PHOTOMETER
O3 CALIBRATION MANIFOLD

To other calibrators or
instruments

PHOTOMETER INLET
Capped PHOTOMETER OUTLET Max Length=3 meters
( or 10 feet)
Vent line PHOTOMETER ZERO IN
Max Length=3 meters PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT Capped
( or 10 feet) EXHAUST

CYL1
CYL2 VENT
Calibration CYL3
Source Gas CAL OUT Must be vented with at least
CYL4 3 ft of 1/4 inch tubing. If the
connections are CAL OUT gas flow on this line is
as shown in ≥ 5 SLPM the minimum O.D.

Enclosure Wall
Section 3.2 must be 3/8 inch
DILUENT IN
Calibrator
CAL OUT gas outlet
connections to
manifolds/instruments

Figure 5-7. External Photometer Validation Setup with Calibration Manifolds

Note The manifolds as shown in the above illustration are

oriented to simplify the drawing. The actual orientation in
your setup is with the ports facing upward. All unused
ports should be capped. A minimum of 1.1 LPM is required
for the external zero air source.

5.2.3.3. CALIBRATION MANIFOLD EXHAUST/VENT LINE REQUIREMENTS

The manifold’s excess gas should be vented to a suitable vent outside of the room. The
internal diameter of this vent should be large enough to avoid any appreciable pressure
drop, and it must be located sufficiently downstream of the output ports to ensure that no
ambient air enters the manifold due to eddy currents or back diffusion.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 141
 5.2.4. PERFORMING O3 PHOTOMETER (OPTION) CALIBRATIONS
To calibrate the photometer, first set the Vars>O3 Gen Mode to BNCH (bench):
1. Navigate to the Utilities>Diagnostics menu.
2. Select the Bench Cal function.

Figure 5-8. Bench Cal Page

3. To calibrate the offset for Zero:

• for an internal O3 Generator press the Zero button.
• for an external O3 Generator press the XZero button.
4. Allow Zero air to enter the PHOTO ZERO IN port of the calibrator’s rear panel.
5. Press the Calibrate button. (Pressing “Yes” in the Confirm Calibration window changes
the Offset and Flow values for the O3 measurement, where “No” aborts the calibration).
6. To calibrate the slope for Span:
• for an internal O3 Generator press the Span button and input the Gen Target
(desired) value and the Actual value from the “Measured” value that appears
(after ~2 minutes) in that field.
• for an external O3 Generator press the XSpan button and input the Actual value
from the external reference photometer’s reading.
7. Allow calibration gas to enter the PHOTO IN port of the calibrator’s rear panel.
8. Press the Calibrate button. (Pressing “Yes” in the Confirm Calibration window changes
the slope value for the O3 measurement, where “No” aborts the calibration).

142 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 5.2.5. O3 PHOTOMETER GAS FLOW CALIBRATION
Note A separate flow meter is required for the procedure.

To calibrate the flow of gas through the calibrator’s optional photometer bench.
1. Turn OFF power to the calibrator.
2. Attach the flow meter directly to the EXHAUST port of the calibrator.
3. Turn ON power to the calibrator.
4. In the Utilities>Diagnostics menu press the button in the Actual Flow field to input
the external flow meter’s reading.
5. Press the Calibrate button.

Figure 5-9. Photometer Flow Calibration Screen

5.2.6. O3 PHOTOMETER BACK PRESSURE COMPENSATION CALIBRATION

Any time there is a pneumatic configuration change (whether locally to the instrument or
to the sampling system) or a gas pressure calibration, there is risk of impacting the internal
measure/reference pressure. To compensate for this, a back pressure compensation
calibration should be performed. To do this, first place the calibrator in Standby Mode (see
Generate menu), then navigate to the Utilities>Diagnostics>Back Pressure Compensation
menu and press the Calibrate button; the operation will take a few minutes.
Another occasion to run a Back Pressure Compensation is if there is a fluctuating difference
of more than .2 in Hg in the Photo Pressure parameter while ozone is being generated. This
would be where the Meas/Ref valve is cycling (about six seconds per full cycle), and the
Photo Pressure reading changes by more than .2 as the valve switches approximately every
three seconds.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 143
5.3. VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE O3 GENERATOR OPTION

5.3.1. SETUP FOR VERIFICATION AND CALIBRATION THE O3 GENERATOR

Note An external reference photometer is required for the
procedure.

Figure 5-10 shows the reference photometer connected directly to the fixtures on the rear
panel.

REFERENCE
PHOTOMETER

PHOTOMETER INLET Capped

PHOTOMETER OUTLET Max Length=3 meters
( or 10 feet)
PHOTOMETER ZERO IN Capped
PHOTOMETER ZERO OUT Capped
EXHAUST
CYL1
CYL2 VENT

Calibration CYL3
Source Gas If the gas flow on
CYL4 CAL OUT
this line is
connections CAL OUT ≥ 5 SLPM the
are as shown minimum O.D.
in Section 3.2 DILUENT IN must be 3/8 inch

Enclosure Wall
Calibrator
CAL OUT gas outlet
connections to
manifolds/instruments

Figure 5-10. O3 Generator Calibration Setup – Direct Connections

5.3.2. VERIFYING O3 GENERATOR PERFORMANCE WITH EXTERNAL PHOTOMETER

After setting up as shown in Figure 8-4 (including the external reference photometer),
navigate to the Generate page.
1. Ensure that the calibrator is in Standby mode (press the Standby button in the
Generate menu).
2. Press the Auto button.
3. Press the Gas button and select O3.

144 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 4. Press the concentration button and/or the units buttons to adjust their values
as needed.
5. Press the Total Flow button to adjust the value for the target flow.
6. Press the Generate button, and then the AUTO button.
Note The readings recorded from the AUTO generate function
and the reference photometer should be within 1% of each
other.

5.3.3. O3 GENERATOR OPTION WITH PHOTOMETER CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

The calibrator’s software includes a routine for automatically calibrating the O3 generator.

Note This procedure requires that the calibrator have an

optional photometer installed.

To run the automatic O3 generator calibration program, navigate to Utilities>Diagnostics

and press O3 Gen Cal.

5.4. VERIFYING AND CALIBRATING THE GAS PRESSURE SENSORS

Note The procedures described in this Section require a
separate pressure meter/monitor.

The Dynamic Dilution Calibrator has several sensors that monitor the pressure of the gases
flowing through the instrument. The data collected by these sensors is used to compensate
the final concentration calculations for changes in atmospheric pressure and is stored in the
CPU’s memory as various test functions:

Table 5-2. Calibrator Pressure Sensor Calibration Setup

ASSOCIATED PRESSURE MONITOR
SENSOR UNITS
DASHBOARD TAG MEASUREMENT POINT
Insert monitor just before the inlet port of the
Diluent Pressure Sensor Diluent Press PSIG
diluent MFC
Insert monitor just before the inlet port of the cal
Cal Gas Pressure Sensor Cal Gas Press PSIG
gas MFC
Insert monitor in line between the regulator and the
O3 Regulator Pressure Sensor
Reg pressure PSIG O3 gas pressure sensor located on the O3
(Optional O3 Generator)
generator / photometer pressure / flow sensor PCA
Sample Gas Pressure Sensor Use monitor to measure ambient atmospheric
Photo Press IN-HG-A
(Optional O3 Photometer) pressure at the calibrator’s location.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 145
 Instrument Chassis
Pressure
Monitor
DILUENT On Back Panel
INLET
PHOTOMETER
INLET
DILUENT
brn
Valve
PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN

brn
Purge
Valve PHOTOMETER
brn ZERO OUT
DILUENT

PRESSURE SENSOR
CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE
INLET SENSOR EXHAUST
INPUT GAS

Diluent
Mass Flow Controller
PCA

CAL GAS 2 PHOTOMETER

INLET OUTLET
CAL GAS
PRESSURE
SENSOR CAL GAS
CAL GAS 3 OUTPUT 1
INLET
orn
CAL GAS
orn OUTPUT 2
CAL GAS 4 yel
INLET
yel blu
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD VENT
yel blu
(on back panel) yel
Cal Gas GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD
Pressure Mass Flow Controller
Monitor

Figure 5-11. Pressure Monitor Points in Basic Unit

Instrument Chassis

Pressure
Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH
Monitor (1.0 LPM)
gry
O3 FLOW

Pressure
SENSOR

Regulator O3 GAS INPUT

PRESSURE SENSOR
grn
GENERATOR

DILUENT
O3 Generator Assembly

INLET PHOTOMETER
grn On Back Panel
PRESSURE SENSOR
DILUENT
O3

brn
Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA vio PHOTOMETER
INLET
Pressure Flow Control REF/MEAS vio
Valve
Monitor (800 cm3)
Flow Control

Purge brn
(10 cm3)

Valve
wht
brn
DILUENT PUMP wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE ZERO IN

INLET SENSOR
Diluent
INPUT GAS

Mass Flow Controller gry PHOTOMETER

O3 Gen ZERO OUT
PCA

CAL GAS 2 Valve

INLET
Cal Gas INTERNAL
CAL GAS VENT
Mass Flow Controller 1
PRESSURE red blk
CAL GAS 3 SENSOR
INLET blk
EXHAUST
orn blu

CAL GAS 4
orn GPT
INLET Valve
yel
yel PHOTOMETER
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel OUTLET
(on back panel)

CAL GAS
Cal Gas red OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 2
Pressure yel
CAL GAS
Monitor
GPT blu
OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
yel GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD
yel

Figure 5-12. Pressure Monitor Points with O3 Options and Multiple Cal MFCs Installed

146 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 5.4.1.1. CALIBRATING DILUENT, CAL GAS, OR OPT O3 GENERATOR PRESSURE
SENSORS
1. Turn off the calibrator and open the top cover.
2. For the sensor being calibrated, insert a “T” pneumatic connector and pressure
monitor at the location described in Table 5-2 and shown in Figure 5-11 and Figure
5-12.
3. Turn on the calibrator, and in the Diagnostics>Pressure Cal menu (Figure 5-13)
highlight the pressure sensor to be calibrated.
4. In the Actual Pressure field (press to bring up keypad) input the value obtained from
pressure meter.
5. (Enable the valve if interface shows an Enable button).
6. Press the Calibrate button, and then confirm that the calibration is to be carried out.
The Status field should read “Success”.

Figure 5-13. Pressure Sensor Calibration Page (Diluent Example)

7. Turn OFF power to the calibrator.

8. Remove the pressure monitor.
9. Restore the pneumatic lines to their proper connections.
10. Close the calibrator’s cover.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 147
 5.4.1.2. CALIBRATING THE PHOTOMETER (OPTION) SAMPLE GAS PRESSURE
SENSOR

Note This calibration must be performed when the pressure of

the photometer sample gas is equal to ambient
atmospheric pressure.

1. Turn off the calibrator and open the top cover.

2. Disconnect power to the photometer’s internal pump.
3. Independently measure the local ambient atmospheric pressure of the calibrator’s
location in In-Hg-A.
4. Turn on the calibrator, and in the Diagnostics>Pressure Cal menu (Figure 5-14)
highlight Photo Press Cal.
5. In the Actual Pressure field (press to bring up keypad) input the value obtained from
the ambient atmospheric pressure measurement.
The Status field should read “Success”.

Figure 5-14. O3 Photometer Pressure Sensor Calibration Page

6. Turn OFF the calibrator.

7. Reconnect the internal pump.
8. Close the calibrator’s cover.

148 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
6. MAINTENANCE
Predictive diagnostic functions including failure warnings and alarms built into the
calibrator’s firmware allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary without
performing painstaking preventative maintenance procedures.
Follow the maintenance schedule provided in this section.

6.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Table 6-1 shows a typical maintenance schedule for the calibrator. The actual frequency of
performing these procedures can vary depending on the operating environment.
Additionally, in some cases, there are local regulations or standards that also need to be
considered. Please note that in certain environments (i.e. dusty, very high ambient pollutant
levels) some maintenance procedures may need to be performed more often than shown.

Note If the instrument has the optional O3 photometer installed,

a Span and Zero Calibration Check must be performed on
the photometer following some of the maintenance
procedure listed below. See Section 5.2 for instructions on
performing checks.

CAUTION
Risk of electrical shock. Disconnect power before performing any of
the following operations that require entry into the interior of the
calibrator.

CAUTION
The operations outlined in this Section are to be performed by
qualified maintenance personnel only.

149 Teledyne API Models T700 andT700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250

Table 6-1. Maintenance Schedule
CAL DATE PERFORMED
CHECK MANUAL
ITEM ACTION FREQ
REQ’D.1 SECTION

Weekly or after
Verify Test Record and
any Maintenance No
Functions analyze
or Repair

Pump
Diaphragm1 No Replacement Required. Under Normal Circumstances this Pump Will Last the Lifetime of the Instrument.

Cleaning of the Photometer Absorption Tube Should Not Be Required

Inspect as long as
Absorption Yes after
Tube1
--- As Needed
cleaning
6.5.2 ONLY CLEAN, DRY, PARTICULATE FREE
Clean Zero Air (Diluent Gas)
is used with the calibrator
Annually or any
time the
Perform Verify Flow
calibrator’s No 5.1
Flow Check of MFCs
internal DAC is
recalibrated
Annually or after
Perform Verify Leak
any Maintenance Yes 6.5.1
Leak Check Tight
or Repair

Pneumatic Examine Yes if

As needed ---
lines and clean cleaned

1 Only applies to calibrator’s with O3 photometer options installed.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 andT700U Calibrators 150

6.2. OPERATIONAL HEALTH CHECKS
Navigate to the Utilities>USB Utilities>Report menu (Figure 6-1) to download a report on
the basic operations of the instrument. To download the report for your own viewing on a
computer or to send to others, insert a flash drive into a front panel USB port and press the
Download button, which is enabled when the instrument detects the flash drive.

Figure 6-1. Report Generation Page

The report can also be set to generate periodically and sent to a Web services “cloud” where
it is available for viewing by Teledyne API technical support personnel. Set this function
with two Vars:
Setup>Vars>Upload Report to Cloud: set to True.
Setup>Vars>Report Upload>Interval: edit the number of hours between report uploads.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 151
6.3. SOFTWARE/FIRMWARE UPDATES
There are two ways to check for and acquire updates: either remotely or manually.

6.3.1. REMOTE UPDATES

The instrument must be connected to a network that is connected to the Internet. In the
Setup>Instrument menu, select the Remote Update menu and the Check for Updates
button. If an update is available, it can be downloaded through this page.

Figure 6-2. Remote Update Page

6.3.2. MANUAL RELOAD/UPDATE PROCEDURES

To reload or update firmware, first contact Technical Support to obtain the applicable
file(s): [email protected] / 800-324-5190.
1. Follow Technical Support’s instructions for copying the firmware files to a flash
drive.
2. Go to the Utilities>USB Utilities>General menu.

Figure 6-3. General Utilities Page

3. Insert a flash drive into a front panel USB port and wait for the Status field to
indicate that the drive has been detected.
4. In the Update Firmware field, press the Check button for the instrument to
determine whether the firmware on the flash drive is more recent than what is

152 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 currently installed. Once it’s been determined that the firmware is new, the
Install button will be enabled; if the firmware version on the flash drive is the
same as or older than the current firmware of the instrument, the Install button
will not be enabled.
5. Press the Install button, and note the messages in the Status field at the
bottom of the page. Use the Cancel button if necessary.
6. When complete, as indicated in the Status field, press the Done button, which
replaces the Cancel button, and remove the flash drive.
7. Power off and restart the instrument to complete the new firmware installation.

6.3.3. INSTRUMENT DISPLAY CALIBRATION (FOR EARLIER INSTRUMENTS

This Section applies to instruments shipped before January 2017. Although unlikely, if
ever the touchscreen appears unresponsive or responds incorrectly, the screen can be
calibrated via the Setup>Instrument>Display Settings menu.

Figure 6-4. Touchscreen Calibration Page

1. Connect a mouse to either of the front panel USB ports.

2. Navigate with the pointer to Setup>Instrument>Display Settings.
3. Click on “Calibrate Touch” and a crosshair appears in the center of the display screen.
4. Note that a timer function is enabled, allowing only 15 seconds to start the calibration
process. If the timer expires, the instrument will exit the calibration screen and return
to normal operation.
5. Click the very center of the crosshair.
6. When a new crosshair appears in the upper left corner of the screen, carefully and
accurately click and hold the very center of that crosshair until it finishes shrinking,
then release.
7. Repeat Step 6 for each of the corners.
8. Once the process is completed, a CANCEL and an ACCEPT button appear in the
lower left corner: Test the accuracy of the calibration by touching parts of the screen
and see that the mouse pointer follows your touches.
9. If you press the CANCEL button, the calibration won’t be altered. Otherwise, press
the ACCEPT button.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 153
6.4. TIME ZONE CHANGES
There is an option to change between 12-hour and 24-hour format in the Setup>Vars menu
(System Time Format), effectively changing the Time Zone requires a specific procedure
as follows:
1. In Setup>Instrument>Date/Time Settings select the applicable Time Zone.
2. Allow adequate time for the selected Time Zone to be properly accepted.
3. Verify: return to Home page then back to the Date/Time Settings page, and
check that the selected Time Zone is now highlighted.
4. Without making any other changes, power OFF the instrument and power ON
again.
5. Once restarted, return to the Date/Time Settings page where the newly
selected Time Zone should be highlighted. (If not, it means that not enough
time had passed for the instrument to accept the change before the power was
cycled OFF).
6. After the Time Zone is implemented first (Steps 1 through 5), then other
changes to the date and/or time can be made, and recycling the power is not
necessary.

Figure 6-5. Time Zone Change Requirements

154 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
6.5. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The following procedures are to be performed periodically as part of the standard
maintenance of the calibrator.

6.5.1. AUTO LEAK CHECK

6.5.1.1. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

• Four (4) 1/4" Pneumatic caps
• One (1) 1/8” Pneumatic Cap
• One (1) # 6 hexagonal Driver/Wrench
• One (1) Pneumatic “T” fitting

6.5.1.2. SETUP FOR AUTO LEAK CHECK

Refer to Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-7 for this procedure. To perform a leak-check on the
calibrator, start by removing the cover from the calibrator. For instruments with basic
configuration, skip to Step 3. For instruments with the optional O3 photometer installed,
bypass the pressure/flow board, the pump, and the O3 generator as follows:

1. Using a #6 nut driver, remove hex nut at the photometer’s gas outlet.

2. Using a #6 nut driver, remove hex nut from the end of the T-fitting mounted on top
of the photometer (or, in older models, on back of O3 Gen/Photometer
Pressure/Flow Sensor board mounted to floor of chassis), and reconnect it to the
photometer’s gas outlet. (The other end of this tube is connected to the O3
generator valve). Now continue to Step 3.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 155
 Figure 6-6. Bypassing the Photometer Sensor PCA and Pump

156 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 3. Using the 1/8” cap, securely cover the outlet of the internal vent (see Figure 6-6)
located just behind the valve relay PCA.

4. Use the 1/4" caps to cover the following gas outlet ports on the calibrator’s rear
panel (see Figure 6-7).
• EXHAUST port (Only required for calibrators with O3 generators
installed).
• both CAL GAS OUT ports
• the VENT port

“T” Fitting

Cap These Ports

Figure 6-7. Gas Port Setup for Auto-Leak Check Procedure

5. If a bottle of source gas is connected to the CYL 1 port, close the bottle’s gas outlet
and disconnect it from the port.

6. Using a “T” type pneumatic fitting, connect a gas line from the zero air gas source to
the Diluent In and to the CYL 1 port u (see Figure 6-7).

7. In the Utilities>Diagnostics>Auto Leak Check menu, press the Check button.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 157
 Instrument Chassis

DILUENT On Back Panel

INLET
PHOTOMETER
INLET
DILUENT
Valve brn
PHOTOMETER
ZERO IN
brn
Purge
Valve PHOTOMETER
brn ZERO OUT
DILUENT

PRESSURE SENSOR
CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE
INLET SENSOR EXHAUST
INPUT GAS Diluent
Mass Flow Controller

CAL GAS 2 PCA

PHOTOMETER
INLET OUTLET
CAL GAS
PRESSURE
yel CAL GAS

CAP
CAL GAS 3 SENSOR
OUTPUT 1
INLET
orn
blu CAL GAS

CAP
orn OUTPUT 2
CAL GAS 4
INLET
yel

CAP
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel VENT
yel blu
(on back panel)
Cal Gas GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD
Mass Flow Controller

yel

Figure 6-8. Gas Flow for Auto-Leak Check of Base Model Calibrators

Instrument Chassis

Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH

(1.0 LPM)
gry

O3 GAS INPUT
O3 FLOW

Pressure
SENSOR

PRESSURE
Regulator
SENSOR
DILUENT grn
GENERATOR

O3 Generator Assembly

INLET PHOTOMETER
grn
PRESSURE SENSOR On Back Panel
DILUENT
O3

Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER vio PHOTOMETER

PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA INLET
vio
brn REF/MEAS
Flow Control
Valve
(800 cm 3)
Flow Control

Purge brn
(10 cm 3)

Valve wht
brn wht PHOTOMETER
DILUENT OFF
/ ZERO IN
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE

INLET SENSOR
Diluent gry PHOTOMETER
INPUT GAS

Mass Flow Controller O3 Gen ZERO OUT

PCA

CAL GAS 2 Valve

INLET blk
INTERNAL
CAP

Cal Gas
CAL GAS VENT
Mass Flow Controller 1 red
PRESSURE
CAL GAS 3 SENSOR
INLET blk
EXHAUST
orn

CAL GAS 4
orn GPT
INLET Valve
yel
yel PHOTOMETER
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel OUTLET
(on back panel)

CAL GAS
CAP

Cal Gas OUTPUT 1

Mass Flow Controller 2 red
yel
GPT CAL GAS
CAP

blu OUTPUT 2
Volume
CAP

VENT
blu
yel GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD
yel

Figure 6-9. Gas Flow for Auto-Leak Check of Calibrators with O3 Generator and Photometer Option

158 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 6.5.1.3. RETURNING THE CALIBRATOR TO SERVICE AFTER PERFORMING AN AUTO
LEAK CHECK
1. Remove all of the caps from the EXHAUST, CAL GAS OUTPUTS (2) and the VENT
port and from the internal vent.
2. On instruments with an optional O3 photometer, reconnect the internal gas lines so
that the Sensor PCA and pump are functional.
3. Remove the tee from the DILUENT IN and CYL 1.
4. Reconnect the ZERO AIR SOURCE to the DILUENT IN.
5. Reconnect Cal Gas bottle to CYL 1 and open the bottle’s outlet port.
6. Replace the calibrator’s top cover.
7. The calibrator is now ready to be used.

6.5.2. CLEANING OR REPLACING THE ABSORPTION TUBE

Note Although this procedure should never be needed as long
as the user is careful to supply the photometer with clean,
dry and particulate free zero air only, it is included here for
those rare occasions when cleaning or replacing the
absorption tube may be required.
1. Remove the center cover from the optical bench.
2. Unclip the sample thermistor from the tube.
3. Loosen the two screws on the round tube retainers at either end of the tube.
4. Using both hands, carefully rotate the tube to free it.
5. Slide the tube towards the lamp housing.
• The front of the tube can now be slid past the detector block and out of
the instrument.

CAUTION
Do not cause the tube to bind against the metal housings.
The tube may break and cause serious injury.

6. Clean the tube by rinsing with de-ionized water.

7. Air dry the tube.
8. Check the cleaning job by looking down the bore of the tube.
• It should be free from dirt and lint.
9. Inspect the o-rings that seal the ends of the optical tube (these o-rings may stay
seated in the manifolds when the tube is removed).

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 159
 10. If there is any noticeable damage to these o-rings, they should be replaced.
11. Re-assemble the tube into the lamp housing and perform an Auto Leak Check on
the instrument.

Note It is important for proper optical alignment that the tube be

pushed all the way towards the front of the optical bench
when it is reassembled prior to gently retightening the
tube retainer screws. This will ensure that the tube is
assembled with the forward end against the stop inside
the detector manifold.

6.5.3. UV SOURCE LAMP ADJUSTMENT

This procedure provides in detail the steps for adjustment of the UV source lamp in the
optical bench assembly. This procedure should be done whenever the Photo Reference
function (in the Vars menu) value drops below 3000 mV.
1. Ensure that the calibrator is warmed-up and has been running for at least 30
minutes before proceeding.
2. Remove the cover from the calibrator.
3. Locate the Photometer option (see Figure 2-4).
4. Locate the UV detector gain adjust pot on the photometer assembly (see Figure
6-10).
5. Navigate to the Utilities>Diagnostics>Analog Inputs menu and scroll to the Photo
Detector input.
6. Using an insulated pot adjustment tool, Turn the UV Detector Gain Adjustment Pot
until the value of Photo Detector is as close as possible to 4600.0 MV.
• Additional adjustment can be made by physically rotating the lamp in its
housing. To do this:
a. Slightly loosen the UV lamp setscrew.
b. Next, slowly rotate the lamp up to ¼ turn in either direction while
watching the Photo Detector signal until the optimum lamp position is
determined, then re-tighten the lamp setscrew.
7. If a minimum reading of 3500.0 mV cannot be reached, the lamp must be replaced.
8. Replace the cover on the calibrator.

Figure 6-10. Photometer Assembly – Lamp Adjustment / Installation

160 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 6.5.4. UV SOURCE LAMP REPLACEMENT
This procedure details the steps for replacement of the UV source lamp in the optical bench
assembly. This procedure should be done whenever the lamp can no longer be adjusted as
described in Section 6.5.3.

1. Turn the calibrator off.

2. Remove the cover from the calibrator.
3. Locate the Optical Bench Assembly (see Figure 2-4).
4. Locate the UV lamp at the front of the optical bench assembly (see Figure 6-10).
5. Unplug the lamp cable from the power supply connector on the side of the optical
bench.
6. Slightly loosen (do not remove) the UV lamp setscrew and pull the lamp from its
housing.
7. Install the new lamp in the housing, pushing it all the way in. Leave the UV lamp
setscrew loose for now.
8. Turn the calibrator back on and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes.
9. Turn the UV detector gain adjustment pot (See Figure 6-10) clockwise to its
minimum value. The pot may click softly when the limit is reached.
10. Perform the UV Lamp Adjustment procedure described in Section 6.5.3, with the
following exceptions:
Slowly rotate the lamp in its housing (up to ¼ turn in either direction) until a
MINIMUM value is observed.
• Ensure the lamp is pushed all the way into the housing while performing
this rotation.
• If the Photo Detector value (Utilities>Diagnostics>Analog Inputs>Photo
Detector) will not drop below 5000 mV while performing this rotation,
contact Teledyne API’S Technical Support for assistance.
Once a lamp position is found that corresponds to a minimum observed value for
Photo Detector, tighten the lamp setscrew at the approximate minimum value
observed.
Adjust Photo Detector within the range of 4400 – 4600 mV.
11. Replace the cover on the calibrator.

CAUTION
The UV lamp contains mercury (Hg), which is considered hazardous
waste. The lamp should be disposed of in accordance with local
regulations regarding waste containing mercury.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 161
 6.5.5. OZONE GENERATOR UV LAMP ADJUSTMENT OR REPLACEMENT
This procedure details the steps for replacement and initial adjustment of the ozone
generator lamp. If you are adjusting an existing lamp, skip to Step 8.
1. Turn off the calibrator.
2. Remove the cover from the calibrator.
3. Locate the O3 generator (see Figure 2-4).
UV Lamp

Set Screws
Lamp
O-ring
O3 Generator
Body

Figure 6-11. O3 Generator UV Lamp Location

4. Remove the two setscrews on the top of the O3 generator and gently pull out the old
lamp.
5. Inspect the o-ring beneath the nut and replace if damaged.
6. Install the new lamp in O3 generator housing, ensuring that it is fully seated.
7. Tighten the two setscrew
8. Turn on calibrator and allow it to stabilize for at least 30 minutes.
9. Replace the calibrator’s cover.
10. Perform an auto-leak check (See Section 6.5.1).
11. Perform an Ozone Generator calibration (see Section 5.3).
.

162 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
7. TROUBLESHOOTING AND SERVICE
This Section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance
problems with the calibrator.

ATTENTION
The operations outlined in this Section must be performed by qualified
maintenance personnel only.

WARNING
• Risk of electrical shock. Some operations need to be
carried out with the instrument open and running.
• Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and
electrostatic or mechanical damage to the calibrator.
• Do not drop tools into the calibrator or leave those after
your procedures.
• Do not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic
tools while operating inside the calibrator.
• Use common sense when operating inside a running
calibrator.

7.1. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING

The Dynamic Dilution Calibrator has been designed so that problems can be rapidly
detected, evaluated and repaired. During operation, it continuously performs diagnostic
tests and provides the ability to evaluate its operating parameters without disturbing
monitoring operations.
A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps:

1. Note any warning messages and take corrective action as necessary.

2. View and compare Dashboard functions’ values to factory values. Note any major
deviations from the factory values and take corrective action.

3. Use the internal electronic status LEDs to determine whether the electronic
communication channels are operating properly.
• Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the
voltage test points on the relay PCA.
• Note that the calibrator’s DC power wiring is color-coded and these colors
match the color of the corresponding test points on the relay PCA.
• Follow the procedures defined in Section 2.4.2 to confirm that the
calibrator’s vital functions are working (power supplies, CPU, relay PCA,
etc.).

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 163
 7.1.1. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH ALERTS
The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message being
displayed as an Alert. Table 7-1 lists warning messages, along with their meaning and
recommended corrective action.
It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same time,
it is often an indication that some fundamental sub-system (power supply, relay PCA,
motherboard) has failed rather than indication of the specific failures referenced by the
warnings. In this case, it is recommended that proper operation of power supplies (See
Section 7.3.3), the relay PCA (See Section 7.3.7), and the motherboard (See Section7.3.11)
be confirmed before addressing the specific warning messages.

Table 7-1. Warning Messages in Alerts Page

ALERT FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES
Configuration and - Failed Disk-on-Module
CONFIG INITIALIZED Calibration data reset to - User has erased configuration data
original Factory state.
Data Storage in DAS was - Failed Disk-on-Module.
DATA INITIALIZED
erased. - User cleared data.
The CPU is unable to - I2C has failed
communicate with either
LAMP DRIVER WARN1, 2 the O3 generator or
photometer lamp I2C driver
chip.
Firmware is unable to - I2C has failed
MFC COMMUNICATION
communicate with any - One of the MFCs has failed
WARNING
MFC. - Cabling loose or broken between MFC and motherboard
- Zero or source air supply is incorrectly set up or
One of the calibrator’s improperly vented.
MFC PRESSURE mass flow controllers
WARNING internal gas pressure is - Leak or blockage exists in the calibrator’s internal
<15 PSIG or > 36 PSIG pneumatics
- Failed CAL GAS or DUILUENT pressure sensor
- No IZS option installed, instrument improperly configured
- O3 generator heater
IZS Ozone Generator
O3 GEN LAMP TEMP - O3 generator temperature sensor
Temp is outside of control
WARNING1 - Relay controlling the O3 generator heater
range of 48°C ± 3°C.
- Entire Relay PCA
- I2C Bus
The photometer pump - Failed Pump
failed to turn on within the - Problem with Relay PCA
O3 PUMP WARNING1
specified timeout period - 12 VDC power supply problem
(default = 30 sec.).
Possible failure of:
- Bench lamp heater
- Bench lamp temperature sensor
PHOTO LAMP TEMP The photometer lamp temp
- Relay controlling the bench heater
WARNING2 is < 51°C or >61°C.
- Entire Relay PCA
- I2C Bus
- Hot Lamp

164 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 ALERT FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES
Value output during the - Faulty UV source lamp
Photometer’s reference - Noisy UV detector
PHOTO LAMP STABILITY cycle changes from - Faulty UV lamp power supply
WARNING measurements to
measurement more than - Faulty ± 15 VDC power supply
25% of the time.
Occurs when Ref is Possible failure of:
PHOTO REFERENCE
<2500 mVDC - UV Lamp
WARNING2
or >4950 mVDC. - UV Photo-Detector Preamp

Motherboard not detected - This warning only appears on Serial I/O COMM Port(s)
on power up. Front Panel Display will be frozen, blank or will not
REAR BOARD NOT DET
respond.
- Failure of motherboard
- Zero or source air supply is incorrectly set up or
improperly vented.
REGULATOR PRESSURE Regulator pressure is - Incorrectly adjusted O3 zero air pressure regulator
WARNING < 15 PSIG or > 25 PSIG. - Leak or blockage exists in the calibrator’s internal
pneumatics
- Failed O3 Generator Input pressure sensor
The CPU cannot - I2C Bus failure
RELAY BOARD WARN communicate with the - Failed relay PCA
Relay PCA. - Loose connectors/wiring
- This message occurs at power on.
The computer has - If it is confirmed that power has not been interrupted
SYSTEM RESET rebooted. - Failed +5 VDC power
- Fatal error caused software to restart
- Loose connector/wiring
The CPU is unable to - I2C Bus failure
VALVE BOARD WARN communicate with the valve - Failed valve driver PCA
board. - Loose connectors/wiring
1 Only applicable for calibrators with the optional the O3 generator installed.
2 Only applicable for calibrators with the optional photometer installed.
3 On instrument with multiple Cal Gas MFCs installed, the MFC FLOW WARNING occurs when the flow rate requested is

<10% of the range of the lowest rated MFC (i.e. all of the cal gas MFC are turned off).

7.1.2. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH DASHBOARD FUNCTIONS

Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the Dashboard functions viewable from
the calibrator’s front panel can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems
when combined with a thorough understanding of the calibrator’s Theory of Operation (see
Section 8).
The acceptable ranges for these functions are listed in the “Nominal Range” column of the
calibrator Final Calibrated Test and Validation Data Sheet shipped with the instrument.
Values outside these acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the calibrator’s
subsystems. Functions whose values are still within acceptable ranges but have
significantly changed from the measurement recorded on the factory data sheet may also
indicate a failure.
Table 7-2 contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 165
Table 7-2. Dashboard Functions – Indicated Failures
FUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC RELEVANCE AND CAUSES OF FAULT CONDITIONS.
Gas flow problems directly affect the concentration accuracy of the calibrator’s calibration gas
O3 Flow1 mixtures.
- Check for Gas Flow problems.
Check the O3 generator heater and temperature sensors.
O3 Gen Drive1
Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 7-1.
Incorrect Lamp temperature can affect the efficiency and durability of the O3 generators UV lamp.
O3 LampTemp1
Possible causes of faults are the same as O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 7-1.
Affects proper flow rate of Cal gas MFCs.
Cal Gas Press
Possible causes of faults are the same as MFC PRESSURE WARNING from Table 7-1.
Affects proper flow rate of Diluent gas MFCs.
Diluent Press
Possible causes of faults are the same as MFC PRESSURE WARNING from Table 7-1.
REG PRES Same as REGULATOR PRESSURE WARNING from Table 7-1.
Box Temperature typically runs ~7°C warmer than ambient temperature. If the Box Temperature
is out of range, ensure that the:
Box Temp - the exhaust fan is running.
- there is sufficient space on the exterior sides and rear of the instrument to allow adequate
ventilation.
If the value displayed is too high (>4950 mV) the UV Source has become brighter. Adjust the
variable gain potentiometer on the UV Preamp Board in the optical bench.
If the value displayed is too low:
- < 200mV – Bad UV lamp or UV lamp power supply.
- < 2500mV – Lamp output has dropped, adjust UV Preamp Board or replace lamp.
O3 Meas2
& If the value displayed is constantly changing:
O3 Ref2 - Bad UV lamp.
- Defective UV lamp power supply.
- Failed I2C Bus.
If the O3 Ref value changes by more than 10mV between zero and span gas:
- Defective/leaking M/R switching valve.
Gas flow problems directly affect the accuracy of the photometer measurements and therefore the
Photo Flow2 concentration accuracy of cal gas mixtures involving O3 and GPT mixtures.
- Check for Gas Flow problems.
Poor photometer temp control can cause instrument noise, stability and drift. Temperatures
Photo Lamp Temp2 outside of the specified range or oscillating temperatures are cause for concern.
Possible causes of faults are the same as PHOTO LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 7-1.
The pressure of the gas in the photometer’s sample chamber is used to calculate the
Photo Press2 concentration of O3 in the gas stream. Incorrect sample pressure can cause inaccurate readings.
- Check for Gas Flow problems. See Section Table 7-1.

166 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 FUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC RELEVANCE AND CAUSES OF FAULT CONDITIONS.
The temperature of the gas in the photometer’s sample chamber is used to calculate the
concentration of O3 in the gas stream. Incorrect sample temperature can cause inaccurate
readings.
Possible causes of faults are:
- Bad bench lamp heater
Photo Samp Temp2
- Failed sample temperature sensor
- Failed relay controlling the bench heater
- Failed Relay PCA
- I2C Bus malfunction
- Hot lamp
Values outside range indicate:
Contamination of the Zero Air or Span Gas supply.
Instrument is miss-calibrated.
Photo Slope2
Blocked Gas Flow.
Faulty Sample Pressure Sensor or circuitry.
Bad/incorrect Span Gas concentration.
Values outside range indicate:
Photo Offset2
Contamination of the Zero Air supply.
1 Only appears when the optional O3 generator is installed.
2 Only appears when the optional O3 photometer is installed

7.1.3. USING THE SIGNALS FOR DIAGNOSTICS

The Signal I/O parameters found in the Dashboard and in the Utilities>Diagnostics
submenus, combined with a thorough understanding of the instrument’s Theory of
Operation (found in Section 8), are useful for troubleshooting in three ways:
• The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the
calibrator’s critical inputs and outputs.
• Many of the components and functions that are normally under
algorithmic control of the CPU can be manually exercised.
• The technician can directly control the signal level Analog and Digital
Output signals.
This allows the technician to observe systematically the effect of directly controlling these
signals on the operation of the calibrator.

7.1.4. USING THE ANALOG OUTPUTS MENU

The signals available for output over the calibrator’s analog output channel can also be
used as diagnostic tools. Table 7-3 lists the functions that can be viewed from the
Utilities>Diagnostics>Analog Outputs menu. Analog Outputs 1 through 3 are wired for the
MFCs, while the 4th is user-configurable through the Setup>Analog Outputs>Analog
Output Cfg menu (Section 2.6.9).

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 167
Table 7-3. DIAG – Analog Output Functions
SUB MENU FUNCTION
Analog Output 1: Diluent MFC Drive These channels are used by the calibrator internally as drive
Analog Output 2: Cal1 MFC Drive voltages for instruments with analog MFCs.
Analog Output 3: Cal2 MFC Drive (Option) The settings are preconfigured at the factory and not user-editable.

Analog Output 4: [user-selected function] This is the analog output, user-configured in the Setup>Analog
Outputs>Analog Output Cfg1 menu, with the following parameters:
• Signal Out: function selected for output.
• Min Max: allowable value range for the Signal Out function.
• Calibration Type. Sets the channel for automatic or manual
calibration
• Range1: signal type (voltage or current loop) and full-scale value
of the output.
• Recorder Offset1: bipolar voltage offset (not available when
Range is set to Current loop).
• Allow Overrange: ± 5% over-range feature enabled or disabled
for this output channel.
1After making changes to this output, recalibrate from the Setup>Analog Outputs>Analog Output Cal menu.

Compare the Utilities>Diagnostics>Analog Outputs>Analog Output 4’s voltage value to

the reading for the same parameter in Home>Dashboard. The scaled voltage signal should
be relative to the Dashboard reading. For example, if Analog Output 4 were mapped to
Box Temp (in the Setup>Analog Outputs>Analog Output Cfg menu), and its Min Max
values were set to 0 and 100, respectively, then a Dashboard Box Temp reading of ~30oC
(6-7° above room temperature) should correspond to a voltage signal around ~1450 mV.
(See Section 7.3.15.1 for this example).

Table 7-4. Analog In Readings as Diagnostic Tools

FULL CAUSES OF EXTREMELY
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ZERO
SCALE HIGH / LOW READINGS
The pressure of gas in
Photo Pressure
the photometer 0 "Hg 40 "Hg-In-A Check for Gas Flow problems.
Raw
absorption tube
The gas flow rate
Photo Flow 0 cm3/min 1000 cm3/m Check for Gas Flow problems.
through the photometer
The temperature of gas
Photo Samp Possible causes of faults are the same as Photo Samp Temp
in the photometer 0 C° 70 C°
Temp from Table 7-2.
absorption tube
Possible failure of:
- Bench lamp heater
- Bench lamp temperature sensor
Photo Lamp The temperature of the
0 C° 70 C° - Relay controlling the bench heater
Temp Raw photometer UV lamp
- Entire Relay PCA
- I2C Bus
- Hot Lamp
The temperature of the
O3 Gen Lamp
O3 generator’s UV 0 C° 70 C° Same as O3 GEN LAMP TEMP WARNING from Table 7-1.
Temp Raw
lamp

168 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 FULL CAUSES OF EXTREMELY
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ZERO
SCALE HIGH / LOW READINGS

- I2C Bus malfunction

- Gas flow problem through the photometer.
- Electronic failure of the photometer subsystems.
The current
- Failure or pressure / temperature sensors associated with the
concentration of O3
Photo Detector --- photometer.
being measured by the
photometer. - Bad/incorrect Span Gas concentration.
- Contamination of the Zero Air supply.
- Malfunction of the O3 generator.
- Internal A/D converter problem.

7.2. USING THE INTERNAL ELECTRONIC STATUS LEDS

Several LEDs are located inside the instrument to assist in determining if the calibrators
CPU, I2C bus and Relay PCA are functioning properly.

7.2.1. CPU STATUS INDICATOR

DS5, a red LED, that is located on upper portion of the motherboard, just to the right of the
CPU board, flashes when the CPU is running the main program loop. After power-up,
approximately 30 – 60 seconds, DS5 should flash on and off. If DS5 does not flash then
the program files may have become corrupted; contact Technical Support because it may
be possible to recover operation of the calibrator. If after 30 – 60 seconds, DS5 is flashing,
then the CPU is bad and must be replaced.

Figure 7-1. CPU Status Indicator

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 169
 7.2.2. RELAY PCA STATUS LEDS
There are seven LEDs located on the Relay PCA. Some are not used on this model.

7.2.2.1. I2C BUS WATCHDOG STATUS LEDS

The most important LED is D1, which indicates the health of the I2C bus).

Table 7-5. Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indications

LED FUNCTION FAULT STATUS INDICATED FAILURE(S)
D1 I2C bus Health Continuously ON or Failed/Halted CPU
(Red) (Watchdog Circuit) Continuously OFF Faulty motherboard, valve driver board or relay PCA
Faulty connectors/wiring between motherboard, valve driver
board or relay PCA
Failed/Faulty +5 VDC power supply (PS1)

If D1 is blinking, then the other LEDs can be used in conjunction with DIAG Menu Signal
I/O to identify hardware failures of the relays and switches on the Relay.

7.2.2.2. O3 OPTION STATUS LEDS

Figure 7-2. Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting

Table 7-6. Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications

SIGNAL I/O PARAMETER
LED FUNCTION DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUE
ACTIVATED BY VIEW RESULT
Photometer Valve should audibly change states.
D71
Meas/Ref PHOTO_REF_VALVE N/A If not:
Green
Valve • Failed Valve
D82 O3 Generator • Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay PCA
O3_GEN_VALVE N/A • Failed Relay PCA
Green Valve Status

170 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 D91 Photometer • Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2)
O3-PUMP-ON N/A • Faulty Connectors/Wiring
Green Pump Status
D61,2 GPT Valve
GPT_VALVE N/A
Yellow Status
D151 Photometer Voltage displayed should change.
PHOTO_LAMP_HEATER PHOTO_LAMP_TEMP If not:
Yellow Heater Status
• Failed Heater
D162 O3 Generator • Faulty Temperature Sensor
O3_GEN_HEATER O3_GEN_TEMP • Failed AC Relay
Green Heater Status
• Faulty Connectors/Wiring
1 Only applies on calibrators with photometer options installed.
2 Only applies on calibrators with O3 generator options installed.

7.2.3. VALVE DRIVER PCA STATUS LEDS

The Signal I/O submenu also includes VARS that can be used to turn the various input gas
valves on and off as part of a diagnostic investigation.

Figure 7-3. Valve Driver PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting

Table 7-7. Valve Driver Board Watchdog LED Failure Indications

LED FUNCTION FAULT STATUS INDICATED FAILURE(S)
• Failed/Halted CPU
Continuously ON • Faulty motherboard, valve driver board or relay PCA
D1 I2C bus health
or • Faulty connectors/wiring between motherboard, valve
(Red) (Watchdog Circuit)
Continuously OFF driver board or relay PCA
• Failed/faulty +5 VDC power supply (PS1)

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 171
Table 7-8. Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications
ACTIVATED BY
LED FUNCTION SIGNAL I/O DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUE
PARAMETER
D3 Cal Gas CYL1 CYL_VALVE_1
D4 Cal Gas CYL2 CYL_VALVE_2 Valve should audibly change states and LED should glow.
If not:
D5 Cal Gas CYL3 CYL_VALVE_3 • Failed valve
D6 Cal Gas CYL4 CYL_VALVE_4 • Failed valve driver IC on relay PCA
Purge Valve • Failed valve driver board
D9 PURGE_VALVE
Status • Faulty +12 VDC power supply (PS2)
Diluent Valve • Faulty connectors/wiring
D10 INPUT_VALVE
Status

172 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
7.3. SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT
The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying
possible sources of failures or performance problems within the calibrator. In most cases,
this included a list of possible components or subsystems that might be the source of the
problem. This Section describes how to check individual components or subsystems to
determine if which is actually the cause of the problem being investigated.

7.3.1. VERIFY SUBSYSTEM CALIBRATION

A good first step when troubleshooting the operation of the calibrator is to verify that its
major subsystems are properly calibrated. These are:
• The mass flow controllers (see Section 5.1).
• Test Channel D > A conversion (see Sections 7.3.11.1, and 8.3.4.1).
• Gas pressure calibration (see Section 5.4).
When optional O3 components are installed, you should also check:
• Photometer calibration (see Section 5.2).
• O3 generator calibration (see Section 5.3).

7.3.2. AC MAIN POWER

The calibrator’s electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power regimes.
As long as system is connected to 100-120 VAC or 220-240 VAC at either 50 or 60 Hz it
will turn on and after about 30 seconds show a front panel display.
• Internally, the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA, motherboard and
CPU should turn on as soon as the power is supplied.
• If they do not, check the circuit breaker built into the ON/OFF switch on
the instruments front panel.

WARNING
Should the AC power circuit breaker trip, investigate and correct the condition
causing this situation before turning the calibrator back on.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 173
 7.3.3. DC POWER SUPPLY
If you have determined that the calibrator’s AC mains power is working, but the unit is still
not operating properly, there may be a problem with one of the instrument’s switching
power supplies. The supplies can have two faults, namely no DC output, and noisy output.
To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems, the wiring used to connect the various printed
circuit assemblies and DC Powered components and the associated test points on the relay
PCA follow a standard color-coding scheme as defined in Figure 7-4 and Table 7-9.

TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7

DGND +5V AGND +15V -15V +12R 12V

Figure 7-4. Location of DC Power Test Points on Relay PCA

Table 7-9. DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes

NAME TEST POINT# TP AND WIRE COLOR
Dgnd 1 Black
+5V 2 Red
Agnd 3 Green
+15V 4 Blue
-15V 5 Yellow
+12R 6 Purple
+12V 7 Orange

A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct per the values in
Table 7-10, and an oscilloscope, in AC mode, with band limiting turned on, can be used to
evaluate if the supplies are producing excessive noise (> 100 mV p-p).

174 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
Table 7-10. DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels
CHECK RELAY PCA TEST POINTS
POWER
VOLTAGE FROM TEST POINT TO TEST POINT MIN V MAX V
SUPPLY ASSY
NAME # NAME #
PS1 +5 Dgnd 1 +5 2 4.8 5.25
PS1 +15 Agnd 3 +15 4 13.5 16V
PS1 -15 Agnd 3 -15V 5 -14V -16V
PS1 Agnd Agnd 3 Dgnd 1 -0.05 0.05
PS1 Chassis Dgnd 1 Chassis N/A -0.05 0.05
PS2 +12 +12V Ret 6 +12V 7 11.75 12.5
PS2 Dgnd +12V Ret 6 Dgnd 1 -0.05 0.05

7.3.4. I2C BUS

Operation of the I2C bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the relay PCA
& D2 on the Valve Driver PCA. Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating
properly, the I2C bus is operating properly if D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of the Valve
Driver PCA are flashing
There is a problem with the I2C bus if both D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of the Valve Driver
PCA are ON/OFF constantly.

7.3.5. TOUCHSCREEN INTERFACE

Verify the functioning of the touch screen by observing the display when pressing a touch-
screen control button. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power
supplies are operating properly, but pressing a control button on the touch screen does not
change the display, any of the following may be the problem:
• The touch-screen controller may be malfunctioning.
• The internal USB bus may be malfunctioning.
You can verify this failure by logging on to the instrument using APICOM or a terminal
program. If the analyzer responds to remote commands and the display changes
accordingly, the touch-screen interface may be faulty.

7.3.6. LCD DISPLAY MODULE

Verify the functioning of the front panel display by observing it when power is applied to
the instrument. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies
are operating properly, the display screen should light and show the splash screen and other
indications of its state as the CPU goes through its initialization process.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 175
 7.3.7. RELAY PCA
The Relay PCA can be most easily checked by observing the condition of the status LEDs
on the Relay PCA (see Section 7.2.2), and using the Utilities>Diagnostics>Digital Outputs
menu to toggle each LED ON or OFF.
If D1 on the Relay PCA is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question
(Heater power, Valve Drive, etc.) toggles properly using the Signal I/O function, then the
associated control device on the Relay PCA is bad. Several of the control devices are in
sockets and can be easily replaced. Table 7-11 lists the control device associated with a
particular function.

Table 7-11. Relay PCA Control Devices

FUNCTION CONTROL DEVICE IN SOCKET
UV Lamp Heater Q2 No
O3 Gen Heater Q3 No
All Valves U5 Yes

7.3.8. VALVE DRIVER PCA

Like the Relay PCA the valve driver PCA is checked by observing the condition of the its
status LEDs on the Relay Board (see Section 7.2.2), and using the SIGNAL I/O submenu
under the DIAG menu (see Section 7.1.3) to toggle each LED ON or OFF.
If D2 on the valve driver board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question
(Gas Cyl 1, Purge Valve, etc.) toggles properly using the Signal I/O function, then the
control IC is bad.

7.3.9. INPUT GAS PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY

The input gas pressure/flow sensor PCA, located at the front of the instrument to the left
of the MFCs (see Figure 2-4) can be checked with a voltmeter. The following procedure
assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard as well as the power supplies is
operating properly:

7.3.9.1. BASIC PCA OPERATION

• Measure the voltage across C1: it should be 5 VDC ± 0.25 VDC. If not, then
the board is bad

7.3.9.2. CAL GAS PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S1 with an external pressure meter.

2. Measure the voltage across TP4 and TP1.

• The expected value for this signal should be:

Expected mVDC =
( Pressure
34.18psig )
x 4250mvDC + 750mvDC ± 10%rdg

176 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 EXAMPLE. If the measured pressure is 25 PSIG, the expected voltage level between
TP4 and TP1 would be between 3470 mVDC and 4245 mVDC.

EXAMPLE. If the measured pressure is 30 PSIG, the expected voltage level between
TP4 and TP1 would be between 4030 mVDC and 4930 mVDC.

• If this voltage is out of range, then either pressure transducer S1 is bad, the
board is bad, or there is a pneumatic failure preventing the pressure
transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure properly.

7.3.9.3. DILUENT PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S2 with an external pressure meter.
2. Measure the voltage across TP5 and TP1.
3. Evaluate the reading in the same manner as for the cal gas pressure sensor.

7.3.10. PHOTOMETER O3 GENERATOR PRESSURE/FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY

This assembly is only present in calibrators with O3 generator and/or photometer options
installed. The pressure/flow sensor PCA, located at the rear of the instrument between the
O3 generator and the photometer pump (see Figure 2-4) can be checked with a voltmeter.
The following procedure assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard as well
as the power supplies are operating properly:

7.3.10.1. BASIC PCA OPERATION

• Measure the voltage across C1 it should be 5 VDC ± 0.25 VDC. If not, then
the board is bad.
• Measure the voltage between TP2 and TP1 C1. It should be 1o VDC ± 0.25
VDC. If not then the board is bad.

7.3.10.2. PHOTOMETER PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S1 with an external pressure meter.
2. Measure the voltage across TP4 and TP1.
• The expected value for this signal should be:

Expected mVDC =
( Pressure
30.0In-Hg-A )
x 4660mvDC + 250mvDC ± 10%rdg

EXAMPLE. If the measured pressure is 20 In-Hg-A, the expected voltage level between
TP4 and TP1 would be between 2870 mVDC and 3510 mVDC.

EXAMPLE. If the measured pressure is 25 In-Hg-A, the expected voltage level between
TP4 and TP1 would be between 3533 mVDC and 4318 mVDC.

• If this voltage is out of range, then either pressure transducer S1 is bad, the
board is bad or there is a pneumatic failure preventing the pressure
transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure properly.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 177
 7.3.10.3. O3 GENERATOR PRESSURE SENSOR
1. Measure the pressure on the inlet side of S2 with an external pressure meter.
2. Measure the voltage across TP5 and TP1.
• Evaluate the reading in the same manner as for the cal gas pressure sensor
(see Section 7.3.9).

7.3.10.4. PHOTOMETER FLOW SENSOR

1. Measure the voltage across TP3 and TP1.
• With proper flow (800 cm3/min through the photometer), this should be
approximately 4.5V (this voltage will vary with altitude).
• With flow stopped (photometer inlet disconnected or pump turned OFF) the
voltage should be approximately 1V.
• If the voltage is incorrect, the flow sensor S3 is bad, the board is bad or there
is a leak upstream of the sensor.

7.3.11. MOTHERBOARD

7.3.11.1. A/D FUNCTIONS

The simplest method to check the operation of the A-to-D converter on the motherboard is
to view the two Signal I/O functions to check the two A/D reference voltages and input
signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter.
1. View the value of Ref 4096mV and of Ref Ground. If both are within 3 mV of nominal
(4096 and 0), and are stable ±0.5 mV, then the basic A/D is functioning properly. If not,
then the motherboard is bad.
2. Alternatively, choose a parameter in the Utilities>Diagnostics>Analog Inputs menu such
as Diluent Press Sensor.
• Compare the voltage measured at its origin (see the interconnect drawing in
Appendix B) with the voltage displayed on the front panel.
• If the wiring is intact but there is a large difference between the measured
and displayed voltage (±10 mV) then the motherboard is bad.

178 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 7.3.11.2. ANALOG OUTPUTS VOLTAGE TEST
To verify that Analog Output 4, if configured, is working properly, connect a voltmeter to
the rear panel ANALOG OUT connector and perform an output step test as follows:
1. Navigate to the Utilities>Diagnostics>Analog Outputs page.

Figure 7-5. Analog Outputs Page Example

2. Press the “PresstoSetOutput” button.

3. Set the desired percent of the signal output in the numeric keypad that pops up, and press
Enter.
4. Compare the value displayed in the Analog Output field to the voltmeter.
For each percentage set, the output should be within 1% of the nominal value. Use the table
below as an example. Ensure to take into account any offset that may have been
programmed into the analog output channel.

Table 7-12. Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs
FULL SCALE OUTPUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE
100MV 1V 5V 10V
SIGNAL NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
%
0 0 0 0 0
20 20 mV 0.2 1 2
40 40 mV 0.4 2 4
60 60 mV 0.6 3 6
80 80 mV 0.8 4 8
100 100 mV 1.0 5 10

If one or more of the readings fails to be within range, it is likely that there has been a
failure of the either or both of the DACs and their associated circuitry on the motherboard.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 179
 7.3.11.3. DIGITAL (STATUS) OUTPUTS
To test the status output electronics:
1. Connect a jumper between the “D“ pin and the “” pin on the rear panel STATUS
output connector.
2. Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the “+” pin and the pin corresponding to the
status output that is being tested.
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “” pin and the pin of the output being tested (as
mapped in the Setup>Digital Outputs menu).
4. Under the Utilities>Diagnostics menu, scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get
to the output in question and observe whether it toggles ON or OFF.
5. Alternatively, highlight the Output in the Utilities>Diagnostics menu and toggle it ON or
OFF while observing the voltage on the voltmeter. It should vary between 0 volts for ON
and 5 volts for OFF.

7.3.11.4. DIGITAL CONTROL INPUTS

The rear panel CONTROL IN connectors correspond to the Digital Inputs panel in the
Utilities>Diagnostics menu.

Table 7-13. Calibrator Control Input Pin Assignments and Digital Inputs Panel
CONNECTOR INPUT CORRESPONDING
Top 1 Control Input 01
Top 2 Control Input 02
Top 3 Control Input 03
Top 4 Control Input 04
Top 5 Control Input 05
Top 6 Control Input 06
Bottom 7 Control Input 07
Bottom 8 Control Input 08
Bottom 9 Control Input 09
Bottom 10 Control Input 10
Bottom 11 Control Input 11
Bottom 12 Control Input 12

The control input bits can be tested by applying a trigger voltage to an input and watching
status changes of the associated function in the Utilities>Diagnostics>Digital Inputs:
EXAMPLE: to test the rear panel CONTROL IN pin “1”:
1. In the Utilities>Diagnostics>Digital Inputs menu view the output named Control Input 01.
2. Connect a jumper from the “+” pin on the appropriate connector to the “U” on the same
connector.
3. Connect a second jumper from the “” pin on the connector to the “1” pin.
4. The status of Control Input 01 should change to read “ON”.

180 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 7.3.11.5. CONTROL OUTPUTS
To test the Control Output electronics:
1. Connect a jumper between the “E“ pin and the “” pin on the status output connector.
2. Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output that is
being tested.
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “” pin and the pin of the output being tested (see
Table 7-14).
4. Scroll the Utilities>Diagnostics>Digital Outputs menu until you get to the output in
question.
5. Alternately turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter.
• It should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF.

Table 7-14. Control Outputs Pin Assignments and Functions Check

PIN (LEFT TO RIGHT) CORRESPONDING DIGITAL OUTPUTS
1 Control Output 01
2 Control Output 02
3 Control Output 03
4 Control Output 04
5 Control Output 05
6 Control Output 06
7 Control Output 07
8 Control Output 08
9 Control Output 09
10 Control Output 10
11 Control Output 11
12 Control Output 12

7.3.12. CPU
There are two major types of CPU board failures, a complete failure and a failure associated
with the Disk On Module (DOM). If either of these failures occurs, contact the factory.
For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the
wiring is intact, the CPU is faulty if on power-on, the watchdog LED on the motherboard
is not flashing.
In some rare circumstances, this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard,
specifically U57, the large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board. If this
is true, removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to start up but the
measurements will be invalid.
If the analyzer stops during initialization (the front panel display shows a fault or warning
message), it is likely that the DOM, the firmware or the configuration and data files have
been corrupted.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 181
 7.3.13. THE CALIBRATOR DOESN’T APPEAR ON THE LAN OR INTERNET
Most problems related to Internet communications via the Ethernet card will be due to
problems external to the calibrator (e.g. bad network wiring or connections, failed routers,
malfunctioning servers, etc.) However, there are several symptoms that indicate the
problem may be with the Ethernet card itself.
If neither of the Ethernet cable’s two status LED’s (located on the back of the cable
connector) is lit while the instrument is connected to a network:
Verify that the instrument is being connected to an active network jack.

Check the internal cable connection between the Ethernet card and the CPU board.

7.3.14. RS-232 COMMUNICATIONS

7.3.14.1. GENERAL RS-232 TROUBLESHOOTING

Teledyne API calibrators use the RS-232 communications protocol to allow the instrument
to be connected to a variety of computer-based equipment. RS-232 has been used for many
years and as equipment has become more advanced, connections between various types of
hardware have become increasingly difficult. Generally, every manufacturer observes the
signal and timing requirements of the protocol very carefully.
Problems with RS-232 connections usually center around 4 general areas:
• Incorrect cabling and connectors. See Section 2.3.1.7 for connector and
pin-out information.
• The BAUD rate and protocol are incorrectly configured. See
Section 2.6.11.1.
• If a modem is being used, additional configuration and wiring rules must
be observed. See Section 2.6.11.1.
• Incorrect setting of the DTE-DCE Switch is set correctly. See
Section 4.1.
• Verify that the cable (P/N 03596) that connects the serial COMM ports of
the CPU to J12 of the motherboard is properly seated.

7.3.15. TEMPERATURE PROBLEMS

Individual control loops are used to maintain the set point of the Photometer UV Lamp
(optional), and the Ozone Generator Lamp (optional). If any of these temperatures are out
of range or are poorly controlled, the calibrator will perform poorly.

182 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 7.3.15.1. BOX / CHASSIS TEMPERATURE
The box temperature sensor can’t be directly accessed with a voltmeter to check its
resistance. Instead, the Box Temp voltage signal must be configured in the Setup>Analog
Outputs>Analog Output Cfg menu first: Map the Signal Out field to Box Temp and scale
it 0.0 degC (Min) to 100.0 degC (Max); set the Calibration type to AUTO. Start calibration
in the Analog Output Cal menu. Compare the Home>Dashboard>Box Temp value to the
Utilities>Diagnostics>Analog Outputs>Analog Output 4: Box Temp voltage. That voltage
signal on a scale of 0 to 5,000 mV should be relative to the scaled temperature value. For
example, at ~30oC (6-7° above room temperature) the signal should be ~1450 mV.

7.3.15.2. PHOTOMETER OPTION SAMPLE CHAMBER TEMPERATURE

In the Dashboard, the temperature of the gas in the photometer sample chamber (Photo
Samp Temp) should read approximately 5.0°C higher than the Box Temp reading.

7.3.15.3. UV LAMP TEMPERATURE

There are three possible causes for the UV Lamp temperature to have failed.
• The UV Lamp heater has failed. Check the resistance between pins 5
and 6 on the six-pin connector adjacent to the UV Lamp on the Optical
Bench.
• It should be approximately 30 Ohms.
• Assuming that the I2C bus is working and that there is no other failure
with the Relay board, the FET Driver on the Relay Board may have
failed.
• Using the PHOTO_LAMP HEATER parameter under the Signal I/O function
of the Diag menu, as described above, turn on and off the UV Lamp Heater
(D15 on the relay board should illuminate as the heater is turned on).
• Check the DC voltage present between pin 1 and 2 on J13 of the Relay
Board.
• If the FET Driver has failed, there will be no change in the voltage across
pins 1 and 2.
• If the FET Driver Q2 checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor
in the lamp assembly may have failed.
• Unplug the connector to the UV Lamp Heater/Thermistor PCB, and measure
the resistance of the thermistor between pins 5 and 6 of the 6-pin connector.
• The resistance near the 58 ⁰C set point is ~8.1k ohms.

7.3.15.4. OZONE GENERATOR TEMPERATURE

There are three possible causes for the Ozone Generator temperature to have failed.
• The O3 Gen heater has failed. Check the resistance between pins 5 and
6 on the six-pin connector adjacent to the UV Lamp on the O3
Generator. It should be approximately 5 Ohms.
• Assuming that the I2C bus is working and that there is no other failure
with the Relay board, the FET Driver on the Relay Board may have
failed. Using the O3 Gen Lamp Heater Control parameter in the

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 183
 Utilities>Diagnostics>Digital Outputs menu as described above, turn the
UV Lamp Heater on and off. Check the DC voltage present between pin
1 and 2 on J14 of the Relay Board.

If the FET Driver has failed, there should be no change in the voltage
across pins 1 and 2.
• If the FET Driver checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor in
the lamp assembly may have failed. Unplug the connector to the Ozone
Generator Heater/Thermistor PCB, and measure the resistance of the
thermistor between pins 5 and 6 of the 6-pin connector.

7.4. TROUBLESHOOTING THE OPTIONAL O3 PHOTOMETER

7.4.1. DYNAMIC PROBLEMS WITH THE OPTIONAL O3 PHOTOMETER

Dynamic problems are problems that only manifest themselves when the photometer is
measuring O3 concentration gas mixtures. These can be the most difficult and time
consuming to isolate and resolve.
Since many photometer behaviors that appear to be a dynamic in nature are often a
symptom of a seemingly unrelated static problems, it is recommended that dynamic
problems not be addressed until all static problems, warning conditions and subsystems
have been checked and any problems found are resolved.
Once this has been accomplished, the following most common dynamic problems should
be checked.

7.4.1.1. NOISY OR UNSTABLE O3 READINGS AT ZERO

• Check for leaks in the pneumatic system as described in Section 6.5.1.
• Confirm that the Zero gas is free of Ozone.
• Confirm that the Source Lamp is fully inserted and that the lamp hold-
down thumb-screw is tight.
• Check for a dirty Absorption Cell and/or pneumatic lines. Clean as
necessary as described in Section 6.5.2.
• Disconnect the exhaust line from the optical bench (the pneumatic line at
the lamp end of the bench) and plug the port in the bench. If readings
remain noisy, the problem is in one of the electronic sections of the
instrument. If readings become quiet, the problem is in the instrument's
pneumatics.

7.4.1.2. NOISY, UNSTABLE, OR NON-LINEAR SPAN O3 READINGS

• Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 6.5.1.
• Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as
described in Section 6.5.2.

184 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 • Check for operation of the A/D circuitry on the motherboard. See
Section 7.3.11.1.
• Confirm the Sample Temperature, Sample Pressure and Sample Flow
readings are correct. Check and adjust as required.

7.4.1.3. SLOW RESPONSE TO CHANGES IN CONCENTRATION

• Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as
described in Section 6.5.2.
• Check for pneumatic leaks as described in Section 6.5.1.
• The photometer needs 800 cm3/min of gas flow. Ensure that this is
accounted for when calculating total required output flow for the
calibrator (see Section 2.4.5).

7.4.1.4. THE ANALOG OUTPUT SIGNAL LEVEL DOES NOT AGREE WITH FRONT
PANEL READINGS
• Confirm that the recorder offset (see Section 2.6.9.2) is set to zero.
• Perform an Analog Output calibration (see Section 2.6.9.3).

7.4.1.5. CANNOT ZERO

• Check for leaks in the pneumatic system as described in Section 6.5.1.
• Confirm that the Zero gas is free of Ozone.
• The photometer needs 800 cm3/min of gas flow. Ensure that this is
accounted for when calculating total required output flow for the
calibrator (see Section 2.4.5).

7.4.1.6. CANNOT SPAN

• Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 6.5.1.
• Check for dirty absorption cell and clean or replace as necessary as
described in Section 6.5.2.
• Check for operation of the A/D circuitry on the motherboard. See
Section 7.3.11.1.
• Confirm the Sample Temperature, Sample Pressure and Sample Flow
readings are correct. Check and adjust as required.
• The photometer needs 800 cm3/min of gas flow. Ensure that this is
accounted for when calculating total required output flow for the
calibrator (see Section 2.4.5).

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 185
 7.4.2. CHECKING THE UV LAMP POWER SUPPLY
Note A schematic and physical diagram of the Lamp Power
Supply can be found in Appendix B.

WARNING
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE PRESENT - USE CAUTION.

It is not always possible to determine with certainty whether a problem is the result of the
UV Lamp or the Lamp Power Supply. However, the following steps will provide a
reasonable confidence test of the Lamp Power Supply.
1. Unplug the cable connector at P1 on the Lamp Power Supply and confirm that +15VDC
is present between Pins 1 and 2 on the cable connector.
2. If this voltage is incorrect, check the DC test points on the relay PCA as described in
Section 7.3.3.
3. Remove the cover of the photometer and check for the presence of the following
voltages on the UV lamp power supply PCA (see Figure 8-20):
• +4500 mVDC ±10 mVDC between TP1 and TP4 (grnd)
• If this voltage is incorrect, either the UV lamp power supply PCA is faulty or
the I2C bus is not communicating with the UV lamp power supply PCA.
• +5VDC between TP3 and TP4 (grnd)
• If this voltages is less than 4.8 or greater than 5.25 either the 5 VDC power
supply or the UV lamp power supply PCA are faulty.
• If the above voltages check out, it is more likely that a problem is due to the
UV Lamp than due to the Lamp Power Supply.
• Replace the Lamp and if the problem persists, replace the Lamp Power
Supply.

186 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
7.5. TROUBLESHOOTING THE OPTIONAL O3 GENERATOR
The only significant components of the O3 generator that might reasonable malfunction is
the power supply assembly for the UV source lamp and the lamp itself.

7.5.1. CHECKING THE UV SOURCE LAMP POWER SUPPLY

Note Appendix B includes a schematic of the Lamp Power
Supply.

WARNING
Hazardous voltage present - use caution.

It is not always possible to determine with certainty whether a problem is the result of the
UV Lamp or the Lamp Power Supply, however, the following steps will provide a
reasonable confidence test of the Lamp Power Supply.
1. Ensure that the calibrator is in STANDBY mode.
2. Unplug the cable connector at P1 on the Lamp Power Supply and confirm that +15VDC
is present between Pins 1 and 2 on the cable connector.
3. If this voltage is incorrect, check the DC test points on the relay PCA as described in
Section 7.3.3.
4. Remove the cover of the photometer and check for the presence of the following
voltages on the UV lamp power supply PCA (see Figure 8-20):
• +800 mVDC ±10 mVDC between TP1 and TP4 (grnd)
• If this voltage is incorrect, either the UV lamp power supply PCA is faulty or
the I2C bus is not communicating with the UV lamp power supply PCA.
• +5VDC between TP3 and TP4 (grnd)
• If this voltages is less than 4.8 or greater than 5.25 either the 5 VDC power
supply or the UV lamp power supply PCA are faulty.
• If the above voltages check out, it is more likely that a problem is due to the
UV Lamp than due to the Lamp Power Supply.
• Replace the Lamp and if the problem persists, replace the Lamp Power
Supply.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 187
7.6. REPLACING THE DISK-ON-MODULE
Replacing the Disk-on-Module (DOM) will cause loss of all DAS data; it may also cause
some of the instrument configuration parameters to be lost unless the replacement DOM
carries the exact same firmware version. Whenever changing the version of installed
software, the memory must be reset. Failure to ensure that memory is reset can cause the
analyzer to malfunction, and invalidate measurements. After the memory is reset, the A/D
converter must be re-calibrated, and all information collected in Step 1 below must be re-
entered before the instrument will function correctly. Also, zero and span calibration
should be performed.
1. Document all analyzer parameters that may have been changed, such as range, auto-
cal, analog output, serial port and other settings before replacing the DOM
2. Turn off power to the instrument, fold down the rear panel by loosening the mounting
screws.
3. When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer, locate the Disk-on-
Module in the right-most socket of the CPU board.
4. The DOM should carry a label with firmware revision, date and initials of the
programmer.
5. Remove the nylon standoff clip that mounts the DOM over the CPU board, and lift the
DOM off the CPU. Do not bend the connector pins.
6. Install the new Disk-on-Module, making sure the notch at the end of the chip matches
the notch in the socket.
7. It may be necessary to straighten the pins somewhat to fit them into the socket. Press
the DOM all the way in and reinsert the offset clip.
8. Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine.
9. If the replacement DOM carries a firmware revision, re-enter all of the setup information.

7.7. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE

If this manual and its Service Section do not solve your problems, technical assistance may
be obtained from Teledyne API, Technical Support:
Toll-free Phone: +1 800-324-5190
Phone: +1 858-657-9800
Fax: +1 858-657-9816
Email: [email protected]
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/

188 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
7.8. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQS)
The following list of FAQs is from the Teledyne API’s Technical Support Department’s
most commonly asked questions relating to the Dynamic Dilution Calibrator.
QUESTION ANSWER
My ozone reading is not Look at the Photo Ref/Meas. These are most likely too
what I should expect - low and need to be adjusted up to 4500mV. Another
why? possible cause would be no gas flow to the photometer
causing the O3 reading to be out of range - low

When I generate ozone, it Perform an O3 Gen Adjust (Section 6.5.5), and then an
takes a long time to settle O3 Gen Calibration (Section 5.3). Re-run points.
out, or it fluctuates
around the value until
finally stabilizing.

Why do some buttons They are deactivated until applicable.

appear grayed out or
disappear?

Why does my RS-232

serial connection not There are several possible reasons:
work? The wrong cable: please use the provided or a generic
“straight-through” cable (do not use a “null-modem”
type cable) and ensure the pin assignments are
correct (Section 2.3.1.7 under RS-232 COM Port
Connector Pin-outs).
The DCE/DTE switch on the back of the analyzer is
not set properly; ensure that both green and red
lights are on (Section 4.1).
The baud rate of the analyzer’s COM port does not
match that of the serial port of your computer/data
logger.
When should I change The sintered filters do not require regular replacement.
the sintered filter(s) in the Should one require replacement as part of a
calibrator’s critical flow troubleshooting or repair exercise, contact Technical
orifice(s) and how do I Support.
change them?

How often should I It does not require rebuilding; the entire pump should be
rebuild the photometer replaced every two years.
pump on my calibrator?

How long do the UV The typical lifetime is about 2-3 years.

lamps of the optional O3
generator and
photometer last?

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 189
8. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

8.1. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMIC DILUTION CALIBRATION

The Dynamic Dilution Calibrator generates calibration gas mixtures by mixing bottled
source gases of known concentrations with a diluent gas (zero air). Using several Mass
Flow Controllers (MFCs) the calibrator creates exact ratios of diluent and source gas by
controlling the relative rates of flow of the various gases, under conditions where the
temperature and pressure of the gases being mixed are known (and therefore the density of
the gases are known).
The central processing unit (CPU) calculates both the required source gas and diluent gas
flow rates and controls the corresponding MFCs by the following equation.
Equation 8-1
GASflow
Cf = Ci ×
Totalflow

WHERE:
Cf = final concentration of diluted gas
Ci = source gas concentration
GASflow = source gas flow rate
Totalflow = the total gas flow through the calibrator

Total flow is determined as:

Equation 8-2
TOTALFLOW = GASflow + Diluentflow

WHERE:
GASflow = source gas flow rate
Diluentflow = zero air flow rate
For instruments with multiple source gas MFC total Flow is:
Equation 8-3
Totalflow = GASflow MFC1 + GASflow MFC2 …+ GASflow MFCn + Diluentflow rate

This dilution process is dynamic. The CPU not only keeps track of the temperature and
pressure of the various gases, but also receives data on actual flow rates of the various
MFCs in real time so the flow rate control can be constantly adjusted to maintain a stable
output concentration.
The calibrator’s level of control is so precise that bottles of mixed gases can be used as
source gas. Once the exact concentrations of all of the gases in the bottle are programmed
into the calibrator, it will create an exact output concentration of any of the gases in the
bottle.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 190
 8.1.1. GAS PHASE TITRATION MIXTURES FOR O3 AND NO2
Because ozone is a very reactive and therefore under normal ambient conditions a short-
lived gas, it cannot be reliably bottled, however, an optional O3 generator can be included
in the calibrator that allows the instrument to be use to create calibration mixtures that
include O3.
This ability to generate O3 internally also allows the Dynamic Dilution Calibrator to be
used to create calibration mixture containing NO2 using a gas phase titration process (GPT)
by precisely mixing bottled NO of a known concentration with O3 of a known n
concentration and diluent gas (zero air).
The principle of GPT is based on the rapid gas phase reaction between NO and O3 that
produces quantities of NO2 as according to the following equation:
Equation 8-4

→ NO2 + O2 + hν ( light )
NO + O3 
Under controlled circumstances, the NO-O3 reaction is very efficient (<1% residual O3),
therefore the concentration of NO2 resulting from the mixing of NO and O3 can be
accurately predicted and controlled as long as the following conditions are met:
• The amount of O3 used in the mixture is known.
• The amount of NO used in the mixture is AT LEAST 10% greater than
the amount O3 in the mixture.
• The volume of the mixing chamber is known.
• The NO and O3 flow rates (from which the time the two gases are in the
mixing chamber) are low enough to give a residence time of the
reactants in the mixing chamber of >2.75 ppm min.
Given the above conditions, the amount of NO2 being output by the calibrator will be equal
to (at a 1:1 ratio) the amount of O3 added.
Since:
• The O3 flow rate of the O3 generator is a fixed value (typically about
0.105 LPM);
• The GPT chamber’s volume is known,
• The source concentration of NO is a fixed value,
Once the TOTAL FLOW is determined and entered into the calibrator’s memory and
target concentration for the O3 generator are entered into the calibrator’s software, the
calibrator adjusts the NO flow rate and diluent (zero air) flow rate to precisely create the
appropriate NO2 concentration at the output.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 191
 In this case, Totalflow is calculated as:
Equation 10-4
DILflow = Totalflow - NO GASflow - O3 flow
WHERE:
NOGASflow = NO source gas flow rate (For calibrators with multiple source gas
MFC, NOGASflow is the sum of the flow rate for all of the active cal
gas MFCs)
Totalflow = total gas flow requirements of the system.
O3 flow = the flow rate set for the O3 generator.
DILflow = required diluent gas flow

Again, this is a dynamic process. An optional photometer can be added to the calibrator
that allows the CPU to track the chemiluminescent reaction created when the NO and O3
interact to measure the decrease in NO concentration as NO2 is produced. This information,
along with the other data (gas temperature and pressure, actual flow rates, etc.) is used by
the CPU to establish a very accurate NO2 calibration mixture.

8.2. PNEUMATIC OPERATION

The calibrator pneumatic system consists of the precision dilution system and valve
manifold consisting of four gas port valves and one diluent air valve. When bottles of
source gas containing different, gases are connected to the four source-gas inlet-ports, these
valves are used to select the gas type to be used by opening and closing off gas flow from
the various bottles upstream of the MFCs.

IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA

Exceeding 35 PSI may cause leakage that could cause
unwanted gases to be included in the calibration mixture.
Each valve is rated for up to 40 PSI zero air pressure and
the source gas pressure should be between 25 to 30 PSI
and never more than 35 PSI.

By closing all of the four source gas input valves so that only zero air is allowed into the
calibrator, the entire pneumatic system can be purged with zero air without having to
manipulate the MFCs.
For an instrument in which the O3 generator and GPT pneumatics are installed, a glass
volume carefully selected per the U.S. E.P.A. guidelines is used to optimize NO2 creation.
See Figure 2-22 and Section 2.3.2 for descriptions of the internal pneumatics for the
calibrator.

8.2.1. GAS FLOW CONTROL

The precision of gas flow through the Dynamic Dilution Calibrator is centrally critical to
its ability to mix calibration gases accurately. This control is established in several ways.

192 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 8.2.1.1. DILUENT AND SOURCE GAS FLOW CONTROL
Diluent and source gas flow in the calibrator are directly and dynamically controlled by
using a highly accurate Mass Flow Controller (MFC). These MFCs include internal
sensors, which determine the actual flow of gas though each, and feedback control circuitry
that uses this data to adjust the flow as required. The MFCs consist of a shunt, a sensor, a
solenoid valve and the electronic circuitry required to operate them.
The shunt divides the gas flow such that the flow through the sensor is a precise percentage
of the flow through the valve.
The MFC’s internal sensor operates on a unique thermal-electric principle. A metallic
capillary tube is heated uniformly by a resistance winding attached to the midpoint of the
capillary. Thermocouples are welded at equal distances from the midpoint of the tube. At
zero air flow the temperature of both thermocouples will be the same. When flow occurs
through the tubing, heat is transferred from the tube to the gas on the inlet side and from
the gas back to the tube on the outlet side creating an asymmetrical temperature
distribution. The thermocouples sense the changes of temperature in the capillary tube and
produce a mVDC output signal proportional to that change, which is proportional to the
rate of flow through the MFC’s valve.
The electronic circuitry reads the signal output by the thermal flow sensor measured
through a capillary tube. This signal is amplified so that it is varies between 0.00 VDC and
5.00 VDC. A separate 0 to 5 VDC command voltage is also generated that is proportional
to the target flow rate requested by the CPU. The 0-5VDC command signal is electronically
subtracted from the 0-5VDC flow signal. The amount and direction of the movement is
dependent upon the value and the sign of the differential signal.
The MFC’s valve is an automatic metering solenoid type; its height off the seat is controlled
by the voltage in its coil. The controller’s circuitry amplifies and the differential signal
obtained by comparing the control voltage to the flow sensor output and uses it to drive the
solenoid valve.
As the solenoid valve opens and closes to vary the flow of gas through the shunt, the valve,
and the sensor, in an attempt to minimize the differential between the control voltage for
the target flow rate and the flow sensor output voltage that’s generated by the actual flow
rate of gas through the controller.
This process is heavily dependent on the capacity of the gas to heat and cool. Since the heat
capacity of many gases is relatively constant over wide ranges of temperature and pressure,
the flow meter is calibrated directly in molar mass units for known gases. Changes in gas
composition usually only require application of a simple multiplier to the air calibration to
account for the difference in heat capacity and thus the flow meter is capable of measuring
a wide variety of gases.

8.2.1.2. FLOW CONTROL ASSEMBLIES FOR OPTIONAL O3 COMPONENTS

Whereas the gas flow rates for the final mixing of gases is controlled directly by the
calibrator’s MFCs, under direction of the CPU, other gas flow rates in the calibrator are set
by various flow control assemblies located in the gas stream(s). These assemblies are not
adjusted but maintain precise volumetric control as long as the a critical pressure ratio is
maintained between the upstream and the downstream orifice.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 193
 Instrument Chassis

Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH

(1.0 LPM)
gry

O3 FLOW
Pressure

SENSOR
Regulator O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR
DILUENT

GENERATOR

O3 Generator Assembly
INLET grn PHOTOMETER
grn
PRESSURE SENSOR On Back Panel
DILUENT

O3
Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA vio PHOTOMETER
INLET
brn
REF/MEAS vio

Flow Control
Valve

(800 cm 3)
Flow Control
Purge brn brn

(100 cm 3)
Valve
wht
DILUENT Diluent PUMP wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE ZERO IN

Mass Flow Controller
INLET SENSOR
INPUT GAS

PHOTOMETER
O3 Gen
PCA

ZERO OUT
Valve gry
CAL GAS 2
INLET
INTERNAL
CAL GAS blk VENT
PRESSURE red
CAL GAS 3 SENSOR
blk
INLET EXHAUST
GPT
orn
Valve
CAL GAS 4
orn
PHOTOMETER
INLET OUTLET
yel
yel red
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel)
Cal Gas
yel O3 FLOW CAL GAS
OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 1
CONTROL
ASSEMBLIES
CAL GAS
GPT blu
OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 8-1. Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies with O3 Generator Installed

The flow control assemblies consist of:

• A critical flow orifice.
• Two o-rings: Located just before and after the critical flow orifice, the o-
rings seal the gap between the walls of assembly housing and the critical
flow orifice.
• A spring: Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the
o-rings, the critical flow orifice and the assembly housing.

8.2.1.3. CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICES

The most important component of the flow control assemblies is the critical flow orifice.
Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates. They
operate without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics. By
restricting the flow of gas though the orifice, a pressure differential is created. This pressure
differential combined with the action of the calibrator’s pump draws the gas through the
orifice.
As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop,
the speed that the gas flows though the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of upstream
pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas through the
orifice reaches the speed of sound. As long as that ratio stays at least 2:1 the gas flow rate
is unaffected by any fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream pressure because such
variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by
the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice.

194 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Figure 8-2. Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice

The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice (volume of gas per unit of time), depends on
the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice. The larger the hole, the more gas molecules
(moving at the speed of sound) pass through the orifice.
With a nominal pressure of 10 in-Hg-A in the sample/reaction cell, the necessary ratio of
reaction cell pressure to pump vacuum pressure of 2:1 is exceeded and accommodating a
wide range of variability in atmospheric pressure and accounting for pump degradation.
This extends the useful life of the pump. Once the pump degrades to the point where the
sample and vacuum pressures is less than 2:1, a critical flow rate can no longer be
maintained.

8.2.2. INTERNAL GAS PRESSURE SENSORS

The calibrator includes a single pressure regulator. Depending upon how many and which
options are installed, there are between two and four pressure sensors installed as well.
In the basic unit a printed circuit, assembly located near the front of the calibrator near the
MFCs includes sensors that measure the pressure of the diluent gas and the source gas
currently selected to flow into the calibrator. The calibrator monitors these sensors.
• Should the pressure of one of them fall below 15 PSIG or rise above 36
PSIG a warning is issued.
In units with the optional O3 generator installed a second PCA located at the rear of the
calibrator just behind the generator assembly includes a sensor that measures the gas
pressure of the zero air flowing into the generator. A regulator is also located on the gas
input to the O3 generator that maintains the pressure differential needed for the critical flow
orifice to operate correctly.
• Should the pressure of one of this sensor fall below 15 PSIG or rise
above 25 PSIG a warning is issued.
In calibrators with O3 photometers installed, a second pressure located on the rear PCA
measures the pressure of gas in the photometer’s absorption tube. This data is used by the
CPU when calculating the O3 concentration inside the absorption tube.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 195
8.3. ELECTRONIC OPERATION
ANALOG RS232 COM2 USB COM
IN Male Female port Ethernet

(I2C Bus)

Analog Outputs

or USB
(Selected

COM1 (RS-232 only)

COM2 (RS-232 or RS-485)

by User)
Aout 4 Status Outputs
1-8
Aout 3
MFC3
2nd Cal Gas Control Outputs
Aout 2 1 - 12
(Optional)

Aout 1
Control Inputs
Touchscreen
MFC2 1 - 12
Cal Gas
Display
Analog Outputs
External Digital I/O
(D/A)
MFC1
(Diluent)
Power Up
Circuit PC 104
Diluent
Pressure Sensor
CPU Card
Sensor Inputs

Cal Gas
Disk on
Converter

Pressure Sensor
Module
A/D

O3 Generator Input
Pressure Sensor
Flash
Photometer Sample Gas
Pressure Sensor Box
Chip
Temperature CPU
Status
LED

GPT Valve
(Optional)
2
Thermistor Interface I C Bus
O3 Generator O3 Generator
Valve
UV (Optional)
Lamp RELAY
PCA
Photometer
M/R Valve
Photometer Photometer I2C (Optional)
O3 Generator Sample Gas UV Lamp Status
Temperature Temperature LED
Lamp Supply
Photometer
Valve Driver Lamp Heater
O3 Generator UV Lamp
Temperature PCA I2C
Photometer Status O3 Generator
Detector LED
Lamp Heater
Preamp

Photometer
Absorption tube Photometer Pump
Photometer Purge CAL GAS 2
Lamp Power Valve INLET
Detector CAL GAS 1
Supply INLET
Photometer

DILUENT CAL GAS 4

Valve INLET
CAL GAS 3
INLET

Figure 8-3. Electronic Block Diagram

196 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 The core of the calibrator is a microcomputer (referred to as the CPU) that controls various
internal processes, interprets data, makes calculations, and reports results using specialized
firmware developed by Teledyne API. It communicates with the user as well as receives
data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices via a separate printed
circuit assembly called the motherboard.
The motherboard is directly mounted to the inside rear panel and collects data, performs
signal conditioning duties and routes incoming and outgoing signals between the CPU and
the calibrator’s other major components.
Data are generated by the various subcomponents, such as flow data from the MFCs, O3
concentration from the optional photometer. Analog signals are converted into digital data
by a unipolar, analog-to-digital converter, located on the motherboard.
A variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the calibrator’s major
components, again through the signal processing capabilities of the motherboard. These
status reports are used as data for the concentration calculations and as trigger events for
certain control commands issued by the CPU. They are stored in memory by the CPU and
in most cases can be viewed but the user via the front panel display.
The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of manners:
• Through the calibrator’s front panel LCD touchscreen interface;
• RS232 and RS485 serial I/O channels;
• Via Ethernet;
• Various digital and analog outputs, and
• A set of digital control input channels.
Finally, the CPU issues commands via a series of relays and switches (also over the I2C
bus) located on a separate printed circuit assembly to control the function of key
electromechanical devices such as heaters, motors and valves.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 197
 8.3.1. CPU
The unit’s CPU card (Figure 8-4) is installed on the motherboard located inside the rear
panel. It is a low power (5 VDC, 720mA max), high performance, Vortex86SX-based
microcomputer running Windows CE. Its operation and assembly conform to the PC-104
specification and features the following:

Figure 8-4. Calibrator CPU Board Annotated

The CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage: an embedded 2MB flash chip
and a Disk on Module (DOM).

198 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 8.3.2. RELAY PCA
The relay PCA is one of the central switching and power distribution units of the calibrator;
it communicates with the motherboard over the I2C bus and can be used for detailed
trouble-shooting of power problems and valve or heater functionality.

Figure 8-5. Relay PCA

This is the base version of the Relay PCA. It does not include the AC relays and is used in
instruments where there are no AC powered components requiring control. A plastic
insulating safety shield covers the empty AC Relay sockets.

WARNING
Never remove this safety shield while the instrument is plugged in and
turned on. The contacts of the AC relay sockets beneath the shield
carry high AC voltages even when no relays are present

8.3.2.1. VALVE CONTROL

The relay PCA also hosts valve driver chips that control the valves associated with the O3
generator and photometer. Other valves related to source gas and diluent gas flow are
controlled by a separate valve driver PCA (see Section 8.3.3).

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 199
 8.3.2.2. HEATER CONTROL
The relay PCA controls the various DC heaters related to the O3 generator and photometer.
MOTHERBOARD

A/D
Converter
Thermistor(s)
(V/F)
(e.g. photometer sample gas temp.;
photometer UV lamp temp.; O3 generator
lamp temp.; ect.)

RELAY PCA CPU

DC
Control
Logic

O3 Generator PHOTOMETER
Lamp Heater Lamp Heater

Figure 8-6. Heater Control Loop Block Diagram.

8.3.2.3. RELAY PCA STATUS LEDS & WATCH DOG CIRCUITRY

Several LEDs located on the calibrator’s relay PCA indicate the status of the calibrator’s
heating zones and some of its valves, as well as a general operating watchdog indicator.
Table 8-1 shows the status and functions of these LEDs.

Figure 8-7. Status LED Locations – Relay PCA

200 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
Table 8-1. Relay PCA Status LEDs
LED COLOR DESCRIPTION FUNCTION
D1 Red Watchdog Circuit; I2C bus operation. Blinks when I2C bus is operating properly
D2-6 SPARE
When lit the valve opens the REFERENCE
D71 Green Photometer Meas/Ref Valve
gas path
When lit the valve open to O3 generator gas
D82 Green O3 generator Valve status
path
D9 Green Photometer Pump status When lit the pump is turned on.
D61,2 Yellow GPT Valve status When lit the valve opens the GT Chamber
D10 - 14 SPARE
When lit the photometer UV lamp heater is
D151 Yellow Photometer Heater Status
on
When lit the O3 generator UV lamp heater is
D162 Yellow O3 Generator Heater Status
on
1 Only applies on calibrators with photometer options installed.
2 Only applies on calibrators with O3 generator options installed.

8.3.2.4. RELAY PCA WATCHDOG INDICATOR (D1)

The most important of the status LEDs on the relay PCA is the red I2C Bus watchdog LED,
D1. It is controlled directly by the calibrator’s CPU over the I2C bus. Special circuitry on
the relay PCA monitors D1 for solid on or off of 30-second duration (indicating that the
CPU or I2C bus has stopped functioning) and automatically closes all valves and turns off
all heaters and lamps.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 201
 8.3.3. VALVE DRIVER PCA
A valve driver PCA controls the valves that operate the main source gas and diluent gas
inputs. Like the relay board, this PCA communicates with the CPU through the
motherboard over the I2C bus.

Figure 8-8. Status LED Locations – Valve Driver PCA

8.3.3.1. VALVE DRIVER PCA WATCHDOG INDICATOR (D2)

The most important of the status LEDs on the relay PCA is the red I2C Bus watchdog LED,
D2. It is controlled directly by the calibrator’s CPU over the I2C bus. Like the relay PCA
watchdog, this board’s circuitry monitors this LED and automatically closes all valves and
turns off all heaters and lamps if D2 indicates that the I2C bus has stopped functioning.

202 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 8.3.4. MOTHERBOARD
This is the largest electronic assembly in the calibrator and is the base for the CPU board
and all I/O connectors. This PCA provides a multitude of functions including A/D
conversion, digital input/output, PC-104 to I2C translation, temperature sensor signal
processing and is a pass through for the RS-232 and RS-485 signals.

8.3.4.1. ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL (A/D) CONVERSION

The A/D converter converts analog signals, such as the voltages received from the
calibrator’s various sensors, to digital signals that the CPU can understand.
The A/D consists of a voltage-to-frequency (V-F) converter, a programmable logic device
(PLD), three multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices. The V-F
converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage. The PLD counts the
output of the V-F during a specified time period, and sends the result of that count, in the
form of a binary number, to the CPU.
The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in uni-polar
mode with a +5V full scale. The converter includes a 1% over and under-range. This allows
signals from -0.05V to +5.05V to be fully converted.
For calibration purposes, the A/D converter receives two reference voltages: reference
ground and +4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two voltages and
outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU, which uses these values to compute offset and
slope for subsequent calculations.

8.3.4.2. SENSOR INPUTS

The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D converter through the master
multiplexer from two connectors on the motherboard. Terminating resistors (100 kΩ) on
each of the inputs prevent crosstalk between the sensor signals.

8.3.4.3. THERMISTOR INTERFACE

This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negative-
coefficient, thermistor temperature sensors located inside the calibrator.

8.3.4.4. ANALOG OUTPUTS

The calibrator has one analog output that the user can set to output a VDC signal level
representing the value of any one of several selectable parameters.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 203
 8.3.4.5. EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O
The external digital I/O performs two functions.
The STATUS outputs carry logic-level (5V) signals through an optically isolated 8-pin
connector on the rear panel. These outputs convey on/off information about certain
conditions, such as SYSTEM OK, and can be used to interface with certain types of
programmable devices.
The CONTROL outputs can be used to initiate actions by external peripheral devices in
conjunction with individual steps of a calibration sequence.
The CONTROL inputs can be initiated by applying 5V DC power from an external source
such as a PLC or data logger (Section 2.6.7.1). Zero and span calibrations can be initiated
by contact closures on the rear panel.

8.3.4.6. I2C DATA BUS

I2C is a two-way, clocked, bi-directional, digital serial I/O bus. A transceiver on the
motherboard converts data and control signals from the PC-104 bus to I2C. The data is then
fed to the relay board, optional analog input board and valve driver board circuitry.

8.3.4.7. POWER-UP CIRCUIT

This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during start-up and sets the analog outputs,
external digital I/O ports, and I2C circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the
instrument software can establish control.

8.3.5. INPUT GAS PRESSURE SENSOR PCA

This PCA, physically located to the just to the left of the MFCs, houses two pressure
sensors that measure the pressure of the incoming diluent gas (zero air) and calibration
gases relative to ambient pressure. Pneumatically, both sensors measure their respective
gases just upstream of the associated MFC.
This data is used in calculating the concentration of calibration mixtures.

8.3.6. POWER SUPPLY AND CIRCUIT BREAKER

The calibrator operates in two main AC power ranges: 100-120 VAC and 220-240 VAC
(both ± 10%) between 47 and 63 Hz. A 5-ampere circuit breaker is built into the ON/OFF
switch. In case of a wiring fault or incorrect supply power, the circuit breaker will
automatically turn off the calibrator.

ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY

This instrument is equipped with a universal power supply

that allows it to accept any AC power configuration within
the limits specified in its rear panel label. If the power
circuit breaker trips, correct the cause before powering on
the instrument.

204 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 SENSOR SUITES
AC POWER
Sensor Control
& I/O Logic
DC POWER
ANALOG SENSOR
Photometer UV Detector
Pre-Amplifiers LOGIC DEVICES
& Amplifiers
(e.g. CPU, I2C bus,
Motherboard, etc.)

AC
POWER IN
MFC3
2nd Cal Gas
PS 1
(Optional)
+5 VDC
MFC2
Cal Gas ±15 VDC ON / OFF
RELAY SWITCH
MFC1
(Diluent) PCA
Solenoid PS 2
GAS
TEMPERATURE
Drivers (+12 VDC)
SENSORS

GAS
PRESSURE Cooling
SENSORS OPTIONAL VALVES
• GPT valve,
Fan CAL GAS 1
• O3 Gen valve VALVE
Photometer • Photometer M/R Photometer
UV Lamp P/S valve, etc.)
Pump Solenoid CAL GAS 2
Drivers VALVE

O3 Generator UV VALVE CAL GAS 3

DILUENT
Lamp Xformer VALVE
VALVE
DRIVER PCA
CAL GAS 4
PURGE VALVE
O3 Generator UV O3 Generator VALVE
Lamp P/S UV Lamp

Figure 8-9. Power Distribution Block Diagram

8.3.7. FRONT PANEL TOUCHSCREEN/DISPLAY INTERFACE

The most commonly used method for communicating with the calibrator is via the
instrument’s front panel LCD touchscreen display from where users can input data and
receive information directly.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 205
 LCD Display
and
Touchscreen

Back-Light
+5V Supply
TFT BIAS Supply PWM
10.4, -7.0, 16, 4V

3.3V Touch Screen Controller

CPU TTL Video & 3.3V 18 Bit TTL Data

Remote
Local
USB & 5V
LAN COM4 USB4
Lang. BLController
Utility Cont.

Optional LVDS Optional LVDS

USB2 HUB
USB Master

Front Panel Interface PCA Powered Powered

USB-1 USB-2

Figure 8-10. Front Panel Display Interface Block Diagram

The LCD display is controlled directly by the CPU board. The touchscreen is interfaced to
the CPU by means of a touchscreen controller that connects to the CPU via the internal
USB bus and emulates a computer mouse.

8.3.7.1. FRONT PANEL INTERFACE PCA

The front panel interface PCA controls the various functions of the display and
touchscreen. For driving the display it provides connection between the CPU video
controller and the LCD display module. This PCA also contains:
• power supply circuitry for the LCD display module
• a USB hub that is used for communications with the touchscreen
controller and the two front panel USB device ports
• the circuitry for powering the display backlight

206 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
8.4. SOFTWARE OPERATION
The calibrator’s core module is a high performance, X86-based microcomputer running
Windows CE. On top of the Windows CE shell, special software developed by Teledyne
API interprets user commands from various interfaces, performs procedures and tasks and
stores data in the CPU’s memory devices. Figure 8-11 shows a block diagram of this
software functionality.

Windows CE

API FIRMWARE

Memory Handling Calibrator Operations

• Calibration Data
• Calibration Procedures PC/104 BUS
• System Status Data
• Configuration Procedures
• Autonomic Systems
• Diagnostic Routines

CALIBRATOR
HARDWARE

Interface Handling
• Gas mixture • Sensor input Data
Algorithms Touchscreen
• Measurement • Analog Output Data
Algorithms for • RS232 & RS485 PC/104 BUS
photometer • External Digital I/O

Figure 8-11. Schematic of Basic Software Operation

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 207
8.5. O3 GENERATOR OPERATION

8.5.1. PRINCIPLE OF PHOTOLYTIC O3 GENERATION

Ozone is a naturally occurring substance that is sometimes called "activated oxygen". It
contains three atoms of oxygen (O3) instead of the usual two found in normal oxygen (O2)
that is essential for life. Because of its relatively short half-life, ozone cannot be bottled
and stored for later use and therefore must always be generated on-site by an ozone
generator. The two main principles of ozone generation are UV-light and corona-discharge.
While the corona-discharge method is most common because of its ability to generate very
high concentrations (up to 50%), it is inappropriate for calibration needs since the level of
fine control over the O3 concentration is poor. Also, the corona-discharge method produces
a small amount of NO2 as a byproduct, which also may be undesirable in a calibration
application.
The UV-light method is most feasible in calibration applications where production of low,
accurate concentrations of ozone desired. This method mimics the radiation method that
occurs naturally from the sun in the upper atmosphere producing the ozone layer. An ultra-
violet lamp inside the generator emits a precise wavelength of UV Light (185 nm). Ambient
air is passed over an ultraviolet lamp, which splits some of the molecular oxygen (O2) in
the gas into individual oxygen atoms that attach to other existing oxygen molecules (O2),
forming ozone (O3).
Inlet from
Diluent Source
Valve
O2 In
UV Lamp

To GPT
Chamber O3 Gen 6O2 + hv185 = 3O3
Valve

O3
Out

Flow
Control
To O3 Assembly
Exhaust

Figure 8-12. O3 Generator Internal Pneumatics

208 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 8.5.2. O3 GENERATOR – PNEUMATIC OPERATION
Pneumatic flow through the O3 generator is created by supplying zero air (diluent) to it
under pressure. The zero air source must be capable of maintaining a continuous flow rate
of at least 100 cm3/min unless the optional photometer is also installed, in which case the
minimum continuous flow rate must be at least 1.1 LPM.
Input and output gas flow is directed by two valves, both of which must be open:
• The diluent inlet valve: This valve is located on the back panel and
allows diluent / zero air into the calibrator.
• The O3 generation valve. This valve is located on the body of the O3
generator is downstream from the generator chamber itself and directs
the output of the generator to either the GPT mixing chamber or the
exhaust vent at the back of the calibrator.
The rate of flow through the O3 generator is controlled by a 100 cm3/min flow control
assembly positioned between the O3 generation chamber and the O3 generation valve. A
self-adjusting pressure regulator on the zero air (diluent ) supply gas line maintains the
pressure across the critical flow orifice of the flow control assembly (see Section 8.2.1.3).

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 209
 Figure 8-13. O3 Generator Valve and Gas Fixture Locations

8.5.3. O3 GENERATOR – ELECTRONIC OPERATION

Electronically the O3 generator and its subcomponents act as peripheral devices operated
by the CPU via the motherboard. Sensors, such as the UV lamp thermistor send analog
data to the motherboard, where it is digitized. Digital data is sent by the motherboard to the
calibrator’s CPU and where required stored in either flash memory or on the CPU’s Disk-
on-Module. Commands from the CPU are sent to the motherboard and forwarded to the
various devices via the calibrators I2C bus.

210 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 MOTHER

Thermistor Interface
BOARD PC 104
CPU Card
O3 Generator Input
Pressure Sensor Disk on

Converter
Module

A/D
O3 Generator UV Lamp
O3 Generator
Lamp Heater

Temperature

Sensor Inputs
Flash
Chip
UV
Lamp
I2C Bus

O3 Generator
Lamp Supply
O3 Generator

RELAY PCA
O3 Generator GPT
I2C
Valve Status Valve
LED

Figure 8-14. O3 Generator – Electronic Block Diagram

Figure 8-15. O3 Generator Electronic Components Location

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 211
 8.5.3.1. O3 GENERATOR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
In order to operate at peak efficiency the UV lamp of the calibrator’s O3 generator is
maintained at a constant 48ºC. If the lamp temperature falls below 43ºC or rises above 53ºC
a warning is issued by the calibrators CPU.
This temperature is controlled as described in the Section on the Relay PCA
(Section 8.3.2). The location of the thermistor and heater associated with the O3 generator
is shown in Figure 8-16:

UV Lamp
O3 Generator
Heater Control PCA
(Heater is located beneath
the PCA)

UV Lamp
Thermistor

Figure 8-16. O3 Generator Temperature Thermistor and DC Heater Locations

8.5.3.2. PNEUMATIC SENSOR FOR THE O3 GENERATOR

A pressure sensor, located on the O3 generator and photometer, pressure/flow sensor PCA
(see Figure 2-4), monitors the output gas pressure of the regulator on the O3 generator’s
zero air supply. The regulator is adjusted at the factory to maintain a pressure of 20 PSIG
on this line. If the pressure drops below 15 PSIG or rises above 25 PSIG a warning is
issued.

8.6. PHOTOMETER OPERATION

The photometer’s operation is based on the principle that ozone molecules absorb UV light
of a certain wavelength (in this case 254 nm). A mercury lamp internal to the photometer
emits UV light at that wavelength. This light shines down a hollow glass tube (absorption
tube) that is alternately filled with sample gas during the measure phase and zero
(calibration) gas during the reference phase. (Supplying the sample and calibration gases
at ambient atmospheric pressure establishes a stable gas flow through the absorption tube).
A detector, located at the other end of the glass tube measures the brightness of the UV

212 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 light after it passes through the gas in the tube with and without O3 present. The ratio of
the UV light intensity between the measure phase (O3 present) and the reference phase (no
O3 present) is a key component, along with other data such as the current temperature and
pressure of the gas, to the CPU’s calculating the O3 content.

8.6.1. MEASUREMENT METHOD

This Section presents further details on the method of measurement.

8.6.1.1. CALCULATING O3 CONCENTRATION

The basic principle by which photometer works is called Beer’s Law (also referred to as
the Beer-Lambert equation). It defines how the light of a specific wavelength is absorbed
by a particular gas molecule over a certain distance at a given temperature and pressure.
The mathematical relationship between these three parameters for gases at Standard
Temperature and Pressure (STP) is:
Equation 8-5

I = I0 e -αLC at STP
Where:

Io is the intensity of the light if there was no absorption.

I is the intensity with absorption.
L is the absorption path, or the distance the light travels as it is being absorbed.
C is the concentration of the absorbing gas; in the case of the calibrator, Ozone (O ).
3

α is the absorption coefficient that tells how well O absorbs light at the specific
3

wavelength of interest.

To solve this equation for C, the concentration of the absorbing Gas (in this case O3), the
application of algebra is required to rearrange the equation as follows:
Equation 8-6

Io 1
C = ln ×
I αL at STP
Unfortunately, both ambient temperature and pressure influence the density of the sample
gas and therefore the number of ozone molecules present in the absorption tube thus
changing the amount of light absorbed.
In order to account for this effect the following addition is made to the equation:
Equation 8-7

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 213
 Io 1 Τ 29.92 inHg
C = ln × × ×
I αL 273 o Κ Ρ
Where:

T = sample ambient temperature in degrees Kelvin

P = ambient pressure in inches of mercury
Finally, to convert the result into Parts per Billion (PPB), the following change is made:
Equation 8-8

I 10 9 Τ 29.92 inHg
C = ln o × × ×
I αL 273 o Κ Ρ
The calibrator photometer:
• Measures each of the variables: ambient temperature and ambient gas
pressure; the intensity of the UV light beam with and without O3 present;
• Inserts known values for the length of the absorption path and the
absorption coefficient;
• Calculates the concentration of O3 present in the sample gas.

8.6.1.2. THE MEASUREMENT / REFERENCE CYCLE

In order to solve the Beer-Lambert equation, it is necessary to know the intensity of the
light passing through the absorption path both when O3 is present and when it is not. A
valve called the measure/reference valve, physically located on front-left corner of the O3
generator assembly (see Figure 2-4 and Figure 8-13) alternates the gas stream flowing to
the photometer between zero air (diluent gas) and the O3 output from the O3 generator.
This cycle takes about 6 seconds.

Table 8-2. Calibrator Photometer Measurement / Reference Cycle

TIME INDEX STATUS
0 sec. Measure/Reference Valve Opens to the Measure Path.
0 – 2 sec. Wait Period. Ensures that the absorption tube has been adequately flushed of any
previously present gases.
2 – 3 Seconds Calibrator measures the average UV light intensity of O3 bearing Sample Gas (I)
during this period.
3 sec. Measure/Reference Valve Opens to the Reference Path.
3 – 5 sec. Wait Period. Ensures that the absorption tube has been adequately flushed of O3
bearing gas.
5 – 6 Seconds Calibrator measures the average UV light intensity of Non-O3 bearing Sample Gas (I0)
during this period.
CYCLE REPEAT EVERY 6 SECONDS

214 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 Instrument Chassis

Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH

(1.0 LPM)
gry

O3 FLOW
Pressure

SENSOR
Regulator O3 GAS INPUT
PRESSURE SENSOR
DILUENT

O3 Generator Assembly
GENERATOR
INLET PHOTOMETER
grn grn
PRESSURE SENSOR On Back Panel
DILUENT

O3
Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA vio PHOTOMETER
INLET
brn
Flow Control REF/MEAS vio
Valve
(800 cm3)

Flow Control
Purge brn brn

(100 cm3)
Valve
wht
DILUENT Diluent PUMP wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE ZERO IN

Mass Flow Controller
INLET SENSOR
INPUT GAS

PHOTOMETER
O3 Gen
PCA

ZERO OUT
Valve gry
CAL GAS 2
INLET
INTERNAL
CAL GAS blk VENT
PRESSURE red
CAL GAS 3 SENSOR blk
INLET EXHAUST
GPT
orn
Valve
CAL GAS 4
orn
PHOTOMETER
INLET OUTLET
yel
yel red
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel) yel CAL GAS
Cal Gas OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
GPT blu
OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 8-17. O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Measure Cycle

Instrument Chassis

Flow Control PHOTOMETER BENCH

(1.0 LPM)
gry
O3 FLOW

Pressure
SENSOR

Regulator O3 GAS INPUT

PRESSURE SENSOR
GENERATOR

DILUENT
O3 Generator Assembly

INLET PHOTOMETER
grn grn
PRESSURE SENSOR On Back Panel
DILUENT
O3

Valve O3 GEN / PHOTOMETER

PRESSURE / FLOW SENSOR PCA vio PHOTOMETER
INLET
brn
Flow Control REF/MEAS vio
Valve
(800 cm3)
Flow Control

Purge brn brn

(100 cm3)

Valve
wht
DILUENT Diluent PUMP wht PHOTOMETER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CAL GAS 1 PRESSURE ZERO IN

Mass Flow Controller
INLET SENSOR
INPUT GAS

PHOTOMETER
O3 Gen
PCA

ZERO OUT
Valve gry
CAL GAS 2
INLET
INTERNAL
CAL GAS blk VENT
PRESSURE red
CAL GAS 3 SENSOR blk
INLET EXHAUST
GPT
orn
Valve
CAL GAS 4
orn
PHOTOMETER
INLET OUTLET
yel
yel red
GAS INPUT MANIFOLD yel
(on back panel) yel CAL GAS
Cal Gas OUTPUT 1
Mass Flow Controller 1

CAL GAS
GPT blu
OUTPUT 2

Volume
VENT
blu
GAS OUTPUT MANIFOLD

Figure 8-18. O3 Photometer Gas Flow – Reference Cycle

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 215
 8.6.1.3. THE ABSORPTION PATH
In the most basic terms, the calibrator photometer uses a high energy, mercury vapor lamp
to generate a beam of UV light. This beam passes through a window of material specifically
chosen to be both non-reactive to O3 and transparent to UV radiation at 254nm and into an
absorption tube filled with sample gas.
Because ozone is a very efficient absorber of UV radiation the absorption path length
required to create a measurable decrease in UV intensity is short enough (approximately
42 cm) that the light beam is only required to make one pass through the Absorption Tube.
Therefore, no complex mirror system is needed to lengthen the effective path by bouncing
the beam back and forth.
Finally, the UV passes through a similar window at the other end of the absorption tube
and is detected by a specially designed vacuum diode that only detects radiation at or very
near a wavelength of 254nm. The specificity of the detector is high enough that no extra
optical filtering of the UV light is needed.
The detector reacts to the UV light and outputs a current signal that varies in direct
relationship with the intensity of the light shining on it. This current signal is amplified and
converted to a 0 to 5 VDC voltage analog signal voltage sent to the instrument’s
motherboard where it is digitized. The CPU to be uses this digital data in computing the
concentration of O3 in the absorption tube.
Window Window
UV Detector
ABSORPTION TUBE

Analog current signal Sample Gas IN Sample Gas OUT UV

is output by Detector Source
Absorption Path Length = 42 cm

O-5 VDC analog Photometer

signal Pre amp
to Motherboard PCA

Figure 8-19. O3 Photometer Absorption Path

8.6.1.4. INTERFERENT REJECTION

It should be noted that the UV absorption method for detecting ozone is subject to
interference from a number of sources. The calibrator’s photometer has been successfully
tested for its ability to reject interference from sulfur dioxide, nitrogen dioxide, nitric oxide,
water, and meta-xylene.
While the photometer rejects interference from the aromatic hydrocarbon meta-xylene, it
should be noted that there are a very large number of volatile aromatic hydrocarbons that
could potentially interfere with ozone detection. If the calibrator is installed in an
environment where high aromatic hydrocarbon concentrations are suspected, specific tests
should be conducted to reveal the amount of interference these compounds may be causing.

216 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 8.6.2. PHOTOMETER LAYOUT
The photometer is where the absorption of UV light by ozone is measured and converted
into a voltage. It consists of several sub-assemblies:
• A mercury-vapor UV lamp. This lamp is coated in a material that optically
screens the UV radiation output to remove the O3 producing 185nm
radiation. Only light at 254nm is emitted.
• An AC power supply to supply the current for starting and maintaining
the plasma arc of the mercury vapor lamp.
• A thermistor and DC heater attached to the UV Lamp to maintain the
Lamp at an optimum operating temperature.
• 42 cm long quartz absorption tube.
• A thermistor attached to the quartz tube for measuring sample gas
temperature.
• Gas inlet and outlet mounting blocks that route sample gas into and out
of the photometer.
• The vacuum diode, UV detector that converts UV light to a DC current.
• A preamplifier assembly, which convert the Detector’s current output into
a DC Voltage then amplifies it to a level readable by the A-to-D converter
circuitry of the instrument’s motherboard.
•
UV Lamp Power Sample Gas UV Lamp Thermistor
UV Detector Absorption Tube Transformer Thermistor (UV Lamp Heater Behind Thermistor)

Power Connector
from
+15 VDC power supply Sample Gas
Outlet
UV Detector Sample Gas Inlet UV Lamp Power UV Lamp Heater
Preamp PCA Supply UV Lamp
Control PCA
(200 VAC @ 30 kHz)

Figure 8-20. O3 Photometer Layout – Top Cover Removed

8.6.3. PHOTOMETER PNEUMATIC OPERATION

The flow of gas through the photometer is created by a small internal pump that pulls air
though the instrument. There are several advantages to this “pull through” configuration.
Placing the pump downstream from the absorption tube avoids problems caused by the
pumping process heating and compressing the sample.
In order to measure the presence of low concentrations of O3 in the sample air, it is
necessary to establish and maintain a relatively constant and stable volumetric flow of
sample gas through the photometer. The simplest way to accomplish this is by placing a

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 217
 flow control assembly containing a critical flow orifice directly upstream of the pump but
down stream from the absorption tube.
The critical flow orifice installed in the pump supply line is tuned to create a flow of 800
cm3/min. A pressure sensor and a flow sensor, located on the O3 generator/photometer
pressure flow sensor pca, monitor the pressure and flow rate of the gas passing through the
photometers absorption tube.
See Figure 8-17 and Figure 8-18 for depictions of the airflow related to the photometer.

8.6.4. PHOTOMETER ELECTRONIC OPERATION

MOTHERBOARD PC 104
CPU Card
A/D
PC 104 Bus
Sensor Inputs

Converter Disk on
Module

Flash
Photometer 2 Chip
Sample Gas
I C Bus
Thermistor Interface
Pressure
Sensor
RELAY PCA
Photometer M/R
Valve
Photometer I2C y (Located on 03
Detector Status Generator Assembly)
Photometer LED
Preamp Photometer UV Lamp
Sample Gas Temperature
Temperature

Absorption tube Photometer

Photometer Photometer
Lamp Power
Detector Pump
Supply

Photometer
Lamp Heater
Photometer

Figure 8-21. O3 Photometer Electronic Block Diagram

Like the O3 generator, the O3 photometer and its subcomponents act as peripheral devices
operated by the CPU via the motherboard. Communications to and from the CPU are
handled by the motherboard.
Outgoing commands for the various devices such as the photometer pump, the UV lamp
power supply, or the UV Lamp heater are issued via the I2C bus to circuitry on the relay
PCA which turns them ON/OFF. The CPU also issues commands over the I2C bus that
cause the relay PCA to cycle the measure/reference valve back and forth.
Incoming data from the UV light detector is amplified locally then converted to digital
information by the motherboard. Output from the photometer’s temperature sensors is also
amplified and converted to digital data by the motherboard. The O3 concentration of the
sample gas is computed by the CPU using this data (along with gas pressure and flow data
received from the calibrator’s pressure sensors.

218 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 8.6.4.1. O3 PHOTOMETER TEMPERATURE CONTROL
In order to operate at peak efficiency, the UV lamp of the calibrator’s O3 photometer is
maintained at a constant 58ºC. This is intentionally set at a temperature higher than the
ambient temperature of the calibrator’s operating environment to ensure that local changes
in temperature do not affect the UV Lamp. If the lamp temperature falls below 56ºC or
rises above 61ºC a warning is issued by the calibrator’s CPU.
This temperature is controlled as described in the Section on the relay pca (Section 8.3.2.2).
The following functions report these temperatures and are viewable from the instrument’s
front panel:
• Photo Lamp Temp - The temperature of the UV Lamp reported in ºC.
• Photo Samp Temp - The temperature of the Sample gas in the
absorption tube reported in ºC.

8.6.4.2. PNEUMATIC SENSORS FOR THE O3 PHOTOMETER

The sensors located on the pneumatic sensor just to the left rear of the O3 generator
assembly measure the absolute pressure and the flow rate of gas inside the photometer’s
absorption tube. This information is used by the CPU to calculate the O3 concentration of
the sample gas (See Equation 10-7). Both of these measurements are made downstream
from the absorption tube but upstream of the pump. A critical flow orifice located between
the flow sensor and the pump maintains the gas flow through the photometer at 800
cm3/min.
The following TEST functions are viewable from the instrument’s front panel:
• PHOTOFLOW - flow rate of gas through the photometer measured in
LPM.
• PHOTOSPRESS – pressure of the gas inside the absorption tube. This
pressure is reported in inches of mercury-absolute (in-Hg-A), i.e.
referenced to a vacuum (zero absolute pressure). This is not the same
as PSIG
.

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 219
 GLOSSARY
Note: Some terms in this glossary may not occur elsewhere in this manual.

TERM DESCRIPTION/DEFINITION
an Ethernet standard that uses twisted (“T”) pairs of copper wires to
10BaseT
transmit at 10 megabits per second (Mbps)
100BaseT same as 10BaseT except ten times faster (100 Mbps)
name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne-API to its
APICOM
customers
ASSY Assembly
CAS Code-Activated Switch
Corona Discharge, a frequently luminous discharge, at the surface of a
conductor or between two conductors of the same transmission line,
CD
accompanied by ionization of the surrounding atmosphere and often
by a power loss
Converter Efficiency, the percentage of light energy that is actually
CE
converted into electricity
CEM Continuous Emission Monitoring
Chemical formulas that may be included in this document:
CO2 carbon dioxide
C3H8 propane
CH4 methane
H2O water vapor
HC general abbreviation for hydrocarbon
HNO3 nitric acid
H2S hydrogen sulfide
NO nitric oxide
NO2 nitrogen dioxide
NOx nitrogen oxides, here defined as the sum of NO and NO2
nitrogen oxides, often called odd nitrogen: the sum of NOx plus other
NOy compounds such as HNO3 (definitions vary widely and may include
nitrate (NO3), PAN, N2O and other compounds as well)
NH3 ammonia
O2 molecular oxygen
O3 ozone
SO2 sulfur dioxide
metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter (replaces the obsolete
cm3
abbreviation “cc”)
CPU Central Processing Unit
DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter
DAS Data Acquisition System
DCE Data Communication Equipment

220 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 TERM DESCRIPTION/DEFINITION
DFU Dry Filter Unit
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol used by LAN or
Internet servers to automatically set up the interface protocols between
DHCP
themselves and any other addressable device connected to the
network
DIAG Diagnostics, the diagnostic settings of the analyzer.
Disk On Module, a 44-pin IDE flash drive with up to 256MB storage
DOM
capacity for instrument’s firmware, configuration settings and data
DOS Disk Operating System
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
DR-DOS Digital Research DOS
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory also referred
EEPROM
to as a FLASH chip or drive
ESD Electro-Static Discharge
ETEST Electrical Test
a standardized (IEEE 802.3) computer networking technology for local
Ethernet area networks (LANs), facilitating communication and sharing
resources
Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer, one of the polymers that
FEP
Du Pont markets as Teflon®
Flash non-volatile, solid-state memory
Fabry-Perot Interface: a special light filter typically made of a
FPI transparent plate with two reflecting surfaces or two parallel, highly
reflective mirrors
GFC Gas Filter Correlation
a clocked, bi-directional, serial bus for communication between
I2C bus
individual analyzer components
Integrated Circuit, a modern, semi-conductor circuit that can contain
IC many basic components such as resistors, transistors, capacitors etc
in a miniaturized package used in electronic assemblies
IP Internet Protocol
IZS Internal Zero Span
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LPM Liters Per Minute
MFC Mass Flow Controller
M/R Measure/Reference

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 221
 TERM DESCRIPTION/DEFINITION
the mass, expressed in grams, of 1 mole of a specific substance.
Conversely, one mole is the amount of the substance needed for the
molar mass to be the same number in grams as the atomic mass of
that substance.
MOLAR MASS
EXAMPLE. The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the molar
mass of Carbon is 12 grams. Conversely, one mole of carbon equals
the amount of carbon atoms that weighs 12 grams.
Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements.
NDIR Non-Dispersive Infrared
National Institute of Standards and Technology - Standard Reference
NIST-SRM
Material
PC Personal Computer
Printed Circuit Assembly, the PCB with electronic components, ready
PCA
to use
PC/AT Personal Computer / Advanced Technology
PCB Printed Circuit Board, the bare board without electronic component
Per-Fluoro-Alkoxy, an inert polymer; one of the polymers that Du Pont
PFA
markets as Teflon®
Programmable Logic Controller, a device that is used to control
PLC
instruments based on a logic level signal coming from the analyzer
PLD Programmable Logic Device
PLL Phase Lock Loop
Photo Multiplier Tube, a vacuum tube of electrodes that multiply
PMT
electrons collected and charged to create a detectable current signal
P/N (or PN) Part Number
PSD Prevention of Significant Deterioration
Poly-Tetra-Fluoro-Ethylene, a very inert polymer material used to
PTFE handle gases that may react on other surfaces; one of the polymers
that Du Pont markets as Teflon®
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride, a polymer used for downstream tubing
Rdg Reading
specification and standard describing a serial communication method
between DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and DCE (Data Circuit-
RS-232
terminating Equipment) devices, using a maximum cable-length of 50
feet
specification and standard describing a binary serial communication
RS-485 method among multiple devices at a data rate faster than RS-232 with
a much longer distance between the host and the furthest device
SAROAD Storage and Retrieval of Aerometric Data
SLAMS State and Local Air Monitoring Network Plan
Standard Liters Per Minute of a gas at standard temperature and
SLPM
pressure
STP Standard Temperature and Pressure

222 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 083730700C DCN8250
 TERM DESCRIPTION/DEFINITION
Transfer Control Protocol / Internet Protocol, the standard
TCP/IP
communications protocol for Ethernet devices
TEC Thermal Electric Cooler
TPC Temperature/Pressure Compensation
Universal Serial Bus: a standard connection method to establish
USB communication between peripheral devices and a host controller, such
as a mouse and/or keyboard and a personal computer or laptop
VARS Variables, the variable settings of the instrument
V-F Voltage-to-Frequency
Z/S Zero / Span

083730700C DCN8250 Teledyne API Models T700 and T700U Calibrators 223
APPENDIX A: MODBUS Register Map

MODBUS Description Units

Register Address
(dec., 0-based)
MODBUS Floating Point Input Registers
(32-bit IEEE 754 format; read in high-word, low-word order; read-only)
0 Actual cal. gas flow rate LPM
2 Actual diluent flow rate LPM
4 Photometer measured ozone concentration PPB
6 N/A —
8 Ozone generator flow rate LPM
10 Ozone generator lamp drive mV
12 Ozone generator lamp temperature °C
14 Cal. gas pressure PSIG
16 Diluent pressure PSIG
18 Regulator pressure PSIG
20 Internal box temperature °C
3
22 Permeation tube #1 temperature °C
3
24 Permeation tube flow rate LPM
26 Photometer detector measure reading mV
28 Photometer detector reference reading mV
30 Photometer sample flow rate LPM
32 Photometer lamp temperature °C
34 Photometer sample pressure Inches Hg
36 Photometer sample temperature °C
38 Photometer slope computed during zero/span bench calibration —
40 Photometer offset computed during zero/span bench calibration PPB
42 Ground reference mV
44 Precision 4.096 mV reference mV
1
46 Permeation tube #2 temperature °C
2
48 Ozone Gen Fraction —

083730700C DCN8250 A-1

 MODBUS Description Units
Register Address
(dec., 0-based)
MODBUS Discrete Input Registers
(single-bit; read-only)
0 System reset warning
1 Box temperature warning
2 Photometer lamp temperature warning
3 O3 generator lamp temperature warning
3
4 Permeation tube #1 temperature warning
5 Photometer reference warning
6 Photometer lamp stability warning
7 N/A
8 Regulator pressure warning
9 Any MFC pressure outside of warning limits
10 Any MFC drive less than 10% of full scale or greater than full scale
11 Any MFC sensor offset greater than allowable limit
12 Rear board communication warning
13 Relay board communication warning
14 Valve board communication warning
2
15 O3 generator or photometer lamp I C driver chip communication warning
16 Front panel communication warning
17 Firmware is unable to communicate with any MFC
18 Analog calibration warning
19 System is OK (same meaning as SYSTEM_OK I/O signal)
20 O3 generator not yet stabilized
1
21 Permeation tube #2 temperature warning
MODBUS Coil Registers
(single-bit; read/write)
00-99 Trigger execution of sequence whose name begins with ―00‖ - ―99‖. Turning a coil on executes a
sequence. Turning a coil off does nothing. When reading coils, the value indicates which
sequence is executing. If a coil is on, the sequence is executing; if off the sequence is not
executing. Supports nested sequences, so multiple sequence coils may be on simultaneously.
100 Turning coil on turns on purge. Turning coil off does nothing. When reading coil, the value
indicates whether purge is active. If on, purge is active; if off, purge is not active. Purge may be
invoked within a sequence, so purge coil may be on at the same time as a sequence coil.
101 Turning coil on puts instrument in standby. Turning coil off does nothing. When reading coil, the
value indicates whether instrument is in standby mode. If on, instrument is in standby; if off,
instrument is not in standby.
200-211 Connected to the control outputs (CONTROL_OUT_1– CONTROL_OUT_12). These coils may
be turned both on and off. Reading the coils indicates the current state.
1
Dual permeation tube option.
2
Low range option.
3
Permeation tube option.

083730700C DCN8250 A-2

 APPENDIX B - Interconnects
1 2 4
REVISIONS
REV DESCRIPTION DATE DCN APPROVED
A INITIAL RELEASE 10/4/10 5870 KV

D D
Analog Control RS-232 RS-485
OutJ1020 In 11004 Jl013 JI0IO& 1011
AC POWER
AC POWER SWITCH
Motherboard ENTRANCE 1---+-.+----1 �
058021400
�

04671
-------0 ·-------------------------
VALVE
MD OPT Jl07 nDRIVER BD 036490100
05469
-----,I 06746 J12
r-------1 r-------1

....,_:
UV LAMP
I
:I I I I UV LAMP
r-_-_-_-_-_-
..___t-_- _-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_.-+-----------f.lo..+...J n J20----0n
DRIVER 04775

Mi
J106 J27
-,
: : Jl5 I I 03 I I
-;---t-t----;------;-;'---�-�- r------, L _______ J L _______ J
I \
C I Bench Htr
041440000 I
r-------1 r-------1 C
ANALOG IN OPT \
UV LAMP I
L--� 03829 '-------...J I I UV LAMP
06760 : 06737
r------, n DRIVER J2D------Dn 04776
I \ I BENCH
I I I
'' I 03 Gen Htr L _______ J L _______ J
'"------------ \ 041440100 I

,-----7 FAN Sample Temp. PS37

I IZS □ ET 042010000 J2 JI
I 13 04001 (+5, ±15)
I 0412002 I
L _____ J
,-----7 MFC1
1 PHOTO CAL1 J7 PS39
BENCH □ET
1

100SCCM (DC Pwr) J2 (+12) JI

I 04120 Bl
L _____ J RELAY BOARD
r--53--1 MFC2 045230100
!PRESS/FLO I DIL1
,------""'\.
B IL ______
Jl
0400306 l
J
10SLPM
J9 I-------' GPT VALVE \ B
,-----7
I MFC3 I 1----- Jl l
\
\_ ______
0165901 t
.../

,------,
I CAL2 : i---- J12 I \
L _____ J Meas/Ref Viv 1
04105 Jl3
\ 05522 t
..
... ... ... ...
,------"""
'-------...J

"' .,.,... 1
Jl4 /,, Pump ...,,\ 03 Valve '
Jl5 05522 )
J2
I \
LCD w/Touchscreen I \ '\... ______ ...J

J9 Cntrl Mod
LCD Interface
06790 i 04702 j
07215 06697 JI0 0
L _______________ J
I

J1
PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED
KEY:
1. All part numbers in Italic identify
cables that are refered to in the
A accompanying document 069140100.
2. All items in Dashed boxes are
optional.

SCALE
1/1 F"ILE Q 6 g 1 4 SHEET 1 OF 1
1 2 4

083730700C DCN8250 B-1